Foreword - Amazon Simple Storage Service · 2003 MY COROLLA MATRIX_U (OM12767U) Foreword ... 2003...

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)

i2003 MY COROLLA MATRIX_U (OM12767U)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your completesatisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

! U.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331

! CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free: 1−888−TOYOTA−8 (1−888−869−6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

© 2002 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)

ii 2003 MY COROLLA MATRIX_U (OM12767U)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. Yu are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)

iii 2003 MY COROLLA MATRIX_U (OM12767U)

Important information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limitedwarranties:

! New vehicle warranty

! Emission control systems warranty

! Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details ofthese maintenance requirements. Also included in Section6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-formation, please refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, orreplacement, or for any damage they may cause to, oradverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-tion, damage or performance problems resulting from themodification may not be covered under warranty.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)

iv 2003 MY COROLLA MATRIX_U (OM12767U)

Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing EquipmentStandard.

Installation of a mobiletwo−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such as multi-port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, cruise control system, anti−lock brake system,SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, besure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionarymeasures or special instructions regarding installation.

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in yourToyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle isscrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as theyare, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure tohave the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-sioner removed and disposed of by the qualified serviceshop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of yourvehicle.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)

12003 MY COROLLA MATRIX_U (OM12767U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument cluster overview 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)

2 2003 MY COROLLA MATRIX_U (OM12767U)

1. Rear view mirror remote control levers

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Side vents

4. Instrument cluster

5. Center vents

6. Personal lights

7. Electric moon roof switches andpersonal light

8. Power door lock switches

9. Power window switches

10. Glove box

11. Portable ashtray

12. Cup holders

13. Power outlet (12 VDC)

14. Parking brake lever

15. Auxiliary boxes

16. Automatic transmission selector leveror manual transmission gear shift lever

17. Hood lock release lever

18. Window lock switch

Instrument panel overview

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. Power rear view mirror control switches

2. Interior/instrument panel light controldial

3. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

4. Wiper and washer switches

5. Air conditioning controls

6. Emergency flasher switch

7. Rear window defogger switch

8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight

9. Car audio

10. Auxiliary box or power outlet (115 VAC)

11. Power outlet (12 VDC) or cigarettelighter

12. Ignition switch

13. Cruise control switch

14. Tilt steering lock release lever

15. Toyota vehicle intrusion protectionsystem indicator light

16. Glass hatch opener switch

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. Tachometer

2. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Low fuel level warning light

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer, two trip meters and outsidetemperature gauge

Instrument cluster overview

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Brake system warning light∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Headlight high beam indicator light

SRS warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1 Open door warning light∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1or

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light∗1, ∗3

or

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

or

Headlight low beam indicator light

Tail light indicator light

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 86 in Section 1−5.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 101 inSection 1−6.

∗3: This symbol equipped only on vehicles sold in Canada.

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Overdrive−off indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass hatch 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toyota vehicle intrusion protection system (TVIP) 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


This key works in every lock.

Since the side doors can be locked with-out a key, you should always carry aspare key in case you accidentally lockyour keys inside the vehicle.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

Vehicles with power door lock system—

All the side doors and back door lock andunlock simultaneously with either frontdoor. In the driver’s door lock, turning thekey once will unlock the driver’s door andtwice in succession will unlock all the sidedoors and back door simultaneously.

Keys Side doors—

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


When the interior light dial is in theDOOR position, and all the side doors andback door are unlocked simultaneouslywith a key or wireless remote controltransmitter, the interior lights come on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out, evenif the door is not opened. (For furtherinformation, see “Interior/instrument panellight control” on page 79 in Section 1−4.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handle even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thefront doors while driving. The doorswill open and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

Vehicles with power door lock system—Doors cannot be locked when either frontdoor is open and the key is in the igni-tion.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side.To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locksor unlocks all the side doors and backdoor.

If you do either of the followings, no sidedoor or back door can be unlocked withthe power door lock switch.

! Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter when the front doors areclosed.

! Open the driver’s door or front passen-ger’s door and move the inside lockknobs of both front doors to the lockposition, then close the front doors.

The power door lock switch can be resetin the following ways.

! Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

! Unlock all the side doors and backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

! Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door with the inside lockknob, and then unlock all the sidedoors and back door with the powerdoor lock switch.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

This feature allows you to lock a reardoor so it can be opened from the outsideonly, not from inside. We recommend us-ing this feature whenever small childrenare in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle during an accident. It also helpsprevent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

—Wireless remote control

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door, open the glasshatch or activate the “PANIC” modefrom a distance within approximately 1m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE SIDEDOORS AND BACK DOOR

To lock and unlock all the side doorsand back door, push the switches ofthe transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All theside doors and back door are locked si-multaneously. At this time, turn signallights flash once.

Check to see that all the side doors andback door are securely locked.

If any of side doors or back door is notsecurely closed, or if the key is in theignition switch, locking cannot be per-formed by the “LOCK” switch.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switchonce to unlock the driver’s door alone.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously. At this time, turn signallights flash twice.

When the interior light dial is in theDOOR position, and all the side doors andback door are unlocked simultaneouslywith a wireless remote control transmitter,the interior lights come on for about 15seconds and then fade out, even if thedoor is not opened. (For further informa-tion, see “Interior/instrument panel lightcontrol” on page 79 in Section 1−4.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will be automati-cally locked again.

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the buttonand then push again.

OPENING THE GLASS HATCH

To open the glass hatch, push the“HATCH” switch of the transmitter for1 second.

If the key is in the ignition switch, theglass hatch cannot be opened by the“HATCH” switch.

See “Glass hatch” on page 18 in thissection.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


“PANIC” SWITCH

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows thehorn intermittently and flashes theheadlights, turn signal lights and interi-or lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-hicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, do the following:

! Push the “PANIC” switch once again.

! Unlock any of side doors, back door orglass hatch with the key or wirelessremote control transmitter.

! Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work whenthe ignition key is in the “ON” position.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLTRANSMITTER

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the transmitter.

! Do not leave the transmitter on placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

! Do not disassemble it.

! Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

! Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors or alarm, oroperate from a normal distance:

! Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

! The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see “REPLACINGTRANSMITTER BATTERY”.

If you lose your transmitter, contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toavoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-mote control transmitter” on page 217 inSection 4.)

MODEL/FCC ID: GQ43VT27RCAN: 1470 104 105AMADE IN U.S.A.

This complies with Part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


REPLACING TRANSMITTER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken thatsmall children do not swallow the re-moved transmitter battery or compo-nents.

NOTICE

! During replacing the transmitterbattery, do not push the “LOCK”,“UNLOCK” and “HATCH” switchesmany times.

! When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

! Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

! Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by the fol-lowing procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


3. Put a new transmitter battery with posi-tive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

! Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery should be faced correctly.

! Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

! Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the transmitter, orit may interfere with proper opera-tion.

! Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the transmitter battery insertionand that dust or oils do not adhereto the transmitter case.

! Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

Power windows

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Automatic operation (to open only):Push the switch completely down and thenrelease it. The window will fully open. Tostop the window partway, lightly pull theswitch up and then release it.

Window lockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control each passenger’s win-dow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

! Always make sure the heads, handsand other parts of the bodies of alloccupants are kept completely in-side the vehicle before you closethe power windows. If someone’sneck, head or hands get caught ina closing window, it could result ina serious injury. When anyonecloses the power windows, makesure that he/she operates the win-dows safely.

! When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

! Never leave small children alone inthe vehicle, especially with the igni-tion key still inserted. They coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended children can be involved inserious accidents.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.

If you turn the key fully clockwise, theglass hatch will open. (See “Glass hatch”on page 18 in this section.)

To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

To open the back door, pull the lock re-lease lever.

Operating the power door lock switch orwireless remote control transmitter simul-taneously locks or unlocks the back door.(See “Side doors” on page 8 in this sec-tion.)

When closing the back door, use theinside handle for easier reach to theback door.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” onpage 178 in Section 2 for precautions toobserve in loading luggage.

Back door

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

Keep the back door and glass hatchclosed while driving. This not onlykeeps the luggage from being thrownout but also prevents exhaust gasesfrom entering the vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the back doorand glass hatch dampers, do not ap-ply any force, paint or let any otherforeign matter on them. OPENING THE GLASS HATCH WITH

THE KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit fully clockwise (one step further thanthe back door locking position).

The glass hatch can be opened with thewireless remote control transmitter. See“—Wireless remote control” on page 11 inthis section.

OPENING THE GLASS HATCH WITHTHE GLASS HATCH OPENER SWITCH

Push the glass hatch opener switchwhen the vehicle is stopped.

CAUTION

Do not open the glass hatch whilethe vehicle is moving.

Glass hatch

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If you do either of the followings, theglass hatch cannot be opened with theglass hatch opener switch.

! Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter when the front doors areclosed.

! Open the driver’s door or front passen-ger’s door and move the inside lockknobs of both front doors to the lockposition, then close the front doors.

The glass hatch opener switch can bereset in the following ways.

! Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

! Unlock all the doors with the key orwireless remote control transmitter.

! Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door with the inside lockknob, and then unlock all the doorswith the power door lock switch.

CLOSING THE GLASS HATCH

Lower the glass hatch and push thelower center of it until it is locked.

When you open the back door with theglass hatch opened, the glass hatch willbe closed. After closing the back door,you should check the glass hatch fullyclosed.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” onpage 178 in Section 2 for precautions toobserve in loading luggage.

CAUTION

Keep the back door and glass hatchclosed while driving. This not onlykeeps the luggage from being thrownout but also prevents exhaust gasesfrom entering the vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the back doorand glass hatch dampers, do not ap-ply any force, paint or let any otherforeign matter on them.

TVIP is a theft deterrent system. Ifsomeone attempts to damage or breakinto your vehicle, the system soundsthe alarm while flashing the lights.

Toyota vehicle intrusionprotection system (TVIP)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


SETTING THE SYSTEM

You can set the system as follows.

1. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close all the side doors, back door andglass hatch securely.

4. Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter. At this time, the TVIP indi-cator light comes on.

The system will be set in 30 seconds.When the system is set, the indicatorlight will start to flash.

5. Make sure that the indicator lightflashes. Then you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system because unlockingfrom the inside activates the alarm.

Activating the alarm

If the system detects a threat to thevehicle, it sounds the alarm for oneminute while flashing headlights andturn signal lights. Also, the interiorlights turn on when the interior lightdial is in the DOOR position.

The system detects a threat under any ofthe following conditions:

! Either of the front doors is unlocked bymeans other than the key or wirelessremote control transmitter.

If the key is not in the ignition switch,all the side doors and back door willbe automatically locked again.

! Any of the side doors, back door orglass hatch are forcibly opened.

The alarm will activate when the backdoor is unlocked with a key. Cancel thesystem before unlocking the back door.

! The side windows are tapped or bro-ken.

! The battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected.

! The ignition is hotwired.

After one minute, the alarm automaticallystops and the indicator light starts flashingagain.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, until you cancel the system, thesystem automatically resets the alarm af-ter the alarm has stopped.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in “Activat-ing the alarm”.

Stopping the alarm

You can stop the alarm in either of thefollowing ways:

! Unlock any of the side doors with thekey or wireless remote control transmit-ter.

! Place the ignition switch in the “ON”position.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CANCELLING THE SYSTEM

You can cancel the system as describedin “Stopping the alarm”.

If you cancel the system by unlocking anyof the side doors but no door is openedwithin 30 seconds, all the side doors andback door lock automatically and the sys-tem will be set again.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

You can check the system operation asfollows.

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described in“SETTING THE SYSTEM”.

3. Unlock the driver’s door with the insidelock knob. The system should activateand the alarm should sound.

4. Stop the alarm as described in “Stop-ping the alarm”.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the otherdoors. (For rear side doors, unlock andthen open the doors in step 3.)

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch lever and lift thehood.

Hood

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


3. Hold the hood open by inserting thesupport rod into the slot.

To insert the support rod into the slot,move it straight up. If it is moved to theside or toward the inside of the vehicle,it may become detached.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. and return the support rod to itsclip—this prevents rattles. Then lower thehood and make sure it locks into place.If necessary, press down gently on thefront edge to lock it.

CAUTION

After inserting the support rod intothe slot, make sure the rod supportsthe hood securely from falling downon to your head or body.

NOTICE

Be sure to return the support rod toits clip before closing the hood. Clos-ing the hood with the support rod upcould cause the hood to bend.

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

Fuel tank cap

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever up.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

! Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

! When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap slowly counterclockwise,then pause slightly before removingit. After removing the cap, hang iton the cap hanger.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened. When installing,turn the cap clockwise till you hear aclick.

If the cap is not tightened securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

! Make sure the cap is tightened se-curely to prevent fuel spillage incase of an accident.

! Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use theswitch beside the personal light.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Sun shade operation—

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the rearside.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

To close: Push the switch on the frontside.

As a precaution when closing, the roofstops at the half closed position beforefully closing. Therefore, release the switchand then push it again to close it com-pletely.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “UP”side.To lower: Push the switch on the oppositeside of the “UP” side.

You may stop the moon roof at any de-sired position. The roof will move whilethe switch is being pushed and stop whenreleased except to slide open.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

! While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be seriously in-jured if the vehicle stops suddenlyor if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

! Always make sure nobody placeshis/her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening be-fore you close the roof. If some-one’s neck, head or hand getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in a serious injury. Whenanyone close the roof, first makesure it is safe to do so.

Electric moon roof

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Never leave small children alone inthe vehicle, especially with the igni-tion key still inserted. They coulduse the moon roof switches and gettrapped in the roof opening. Unat-tended children can be involved inserious accidents.

! Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSeats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and MirrorsSeats 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold−down rear seat 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt steering wheel 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirrors 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 3

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

! Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow sitting on top of afolded−down seatback, or in theluggage compartment or cargo area.Persons not properly seated and/orproperly restrained by seat beltscan be severely injured in the eventof emergency braking or a collision.

! During driving, do not allow pas-sengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Severe inju-ries can occur in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

! Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

! Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

! Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the front seatswith the side airbags. Such changesmay disable the system or causethe side airbags to inflate acciden-tally, resulting in death or seriousinjury. Consult your Toyota dealer ifyou insist on modifications of thiskind.

Adjust the driver’s seat so that the footpedals, steering wheel and instrumentpanel controls are within easy reach ofthe driver.

CAUTION

! Adjustments should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving, as theseat may unexpectedly move andcause the driver to lose control ofthe vehicle.

! When adjusting the seat, be carefulthat the seat does not hit a passen-ger or luggage.

! After adjusting the seat position,try sliding it forward and backwardto make sure it is locked in posi-tion.

! After adjusting the seatback, pushback your body to make sure it islocked in position.

! Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat−lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

Seats

Front seats——Front seat precautions (on vehicles with SRS side airbags) —Seat adjustment precautions

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise youmay catch and injure your hands orfingers.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION HEIGHT ADJUSTINGKNOB

Turn the knob either way.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

—Adjusting front seats

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding underthe lap belt during a collision, avoidreclining the seatback any more thanneeded. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection in a frontal or rearcollision when the driver and the pas-senger are sitting up straight andwell back in the seats. If you arereclined, the lap belt may slide pastyour hips and apply restraint forcesdirectly to the abdomen. In the eventof a frontal collision, the more theseat is reclined, the greater the riskof personal injury.

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-est position and fix the seatback atthe most upright lock position.

2. Pull up either seatback lock releaseknob beside the seatback and foldthe seatback down.

CAUTION

Do not sit on or place anything onthe folded seatback to avoid seriousinjury while the vehicle is moving.

—Fold−down frontpassenger’s seat

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


You can use the front passenger’s seat-back as a temporary table only when thevehicle is stopped.

CAUTION

To avoid serious injury:

! Do not set up the seatback tablewhile the vehicle is moving.

! Do not sit on the seatback table.

NOTICE

To prevent the seat from damaging,avoid putting heavy loads on the tem-porary table.

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, make sure the seat-back is securely locked by pushingforward and rearward on the top ofthe seatback. Failure to do so willprevent seat belt from operating prop-erly.

Lower the head restraints to the lowestposition. Pull up the lock release buttonand fold the seatback down.

Each seatback can be folded separately.

This will enlarge the luggage compartmentas far as the seatbacks. See “Luggagestowage precautions” on page 178 in Sec-tion 2 for precautions in loading luggage.

Fold−down rear seat

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


You can use the rear right side seatbackas a temporary table only when the ve-hicle is stopped.

CAUTION




NOTICE


CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventpersonal injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

! Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatbackand that the red mark at the buttonon the top of the seatback cannotbe seen. Failure to do so will pre-vent seat belt from operating prop-erly.

! Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in the properposition and are ready to use.

Front

Rear

Head restraints

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

! Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

! After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

! Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 53 for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow the child to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. It does not provide sufficientrestraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

! Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

! Avoid reclining the seatbacks toomuch. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection when the seatbacksare in the upright position. (Referto the seat adjustment instructions.)

! Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or side doors.

! Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

! Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers—they may severely weaken thebelts. (See “Cleaning the interior”on page 223 in Section 5.)

! Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

Adjust the seat as needed (font seatsonly) and sit up straight and well backin the seat. To fasten your belt, pull itout of the retractor and insert the tabinto the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

—Front and rear seat belts

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 53 in this section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

CAUTION

! After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

! Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causeserious injuries in a collision.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Take upslack

Too high

Keeps as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

! Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended result. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on hipsas possible.

! For your safety, do not place theshoulder belt under your arm.

To release the belt, press the buckle−re-lease button and allow the belt to re-tract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofvehicle accident, increasing thechance of personal injury.

! Never use the seat belt extender ifyou can fasten the seat belt withoutit.

! Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle−release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle−release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

—Seat belt extender

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

! After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the seat belt extender is nottwisted.


! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.

The driver and front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the airbag sensor detects the shockof a severe frontal impact, the front seatbelts are quickly drawn back in by theretractors so that the belts snugly restrainthe front seat occupants.

The front seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated even with no passenger in the frontseat.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensors, driver’s seatposition sensor, driver’s seat belt buckleswitch, front seat belt pretensioner assem-blies, inflators, warning light, interconnect-ing wiring and power sources. (For details,see “Service reminder indicators andwarning buzzers” on page 86 in Section1−5.)

—Front seat beltpretensioners

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The front seat belt pretensioner systemmainly consists of the following compo-nents and their locations are shown in theillustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies

4. Airbag sensor assembly

The front seat belt pretensioners are con-trolled by the airbag sensor assembly. Theairbag sensor assembly consists of a saf-ing sensor and airbag sensor.

When the front seat belt pretensioners areactivated, an operating noise may beheard and a small amount of smoke−likegas may be released. This gas is harm-less and does not indicate that a fire isoccurring.

Once the front seat belt pretensionershave been activated, the seat belt retrac-tors remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe front seat belt pretensioner as-semblies, airbag sensor or surround-ing area or wiring. Doing so maycause sudden operation of the frontseat belt pretensioners or disable thesystem, which could result in deathor serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious inju-ries. Consult your Toyota dealerabout any repairs and modifications.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of thefront seat belt pretensioners in somecases.

! Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

! Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

! Modification of the suspension sys-tem

! Modification of the front end struc-ture

! Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

! Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


This front seat belt pretensioner systemhas a service reminder indicator to informthe driver of operating problems. If any ofthe following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction of the airbags orpretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible to service thevehicle.

! The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or the light remains on.

! The light comes on or flashes whiledriving.

! If either front seat belt does not retractor cannot be pulled out due to a mal-function or activation of the relevantfront seat belt pretensioner.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

! The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe front seat belt pretensioners to op-erate.

! Either front seat belt pretensioner as-sembly or surrounding area isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work together withthe seat belts to help reduce injury byinflating. The SRS front airbags help toreduce injuries mainly to the driver’s orfront passenger’s head or chest caused bydirectly hitting the steering wheel or dash-board. The front passenger airbag is acti-vated even with no passenger in the frontseat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

SRS driver airbag and frontpassenger airbag

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seat belt restraintsystem by the driver and front passengerwhen the SRS airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

! The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

! The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

! All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS front airbags are oper-ating properly.


The SRS front airbag system is de-signed to activate in response to a se-vere frontal impact within the shadedarea between the arrows in the illustra-tion.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen impacting straight into a fixed barrierthat does not move or deform.

If the severity of the impact is below theabove threshold level, the SRS front air-bags may not deploy.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if it is involved in an underridecollision (e.g. a collision in which the noseof the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under,the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions at thelower zone of airbag sensor detection andactivation the SRS airbags and seat beltpretensioners will not operate all together.

For the safety of all occupants, alwayswear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not designedto inflate if the vehicle is involved in aside or rear collision, if it rolls over, orif it is involved in a low−speed frontalcollision.

Hitting a curb, edgeof pavement orhard material

Falling into orjumping over adeep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The front SRS airbags may deploy if aserious impact occurs to the undersideof your vehicle. Some examples areshown in the illustration.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The SRS airbag system consists mainly ofthe following components, and their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors


3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)

4. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

5. Driver’s seat position sensor


7. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

In a severe frontal impact, the sensor de-tects deceleration and the system triggersthe airbag inflators. At this time a chemi-cal reaction in the inflators quickly fills theairbags with non−toxic gas to help restrainthe forward motion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-mally harmless; however, for those whohave delicate skin, it may cause a minorskin irritation. Be sure to wash off anyresidue as soon as possible to preventany potential skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, dashboard) may be hot for severalminutes, but the airbags themselves willnot be hot. The airbags are designed toinflate only once.

A crash severe enough to inflate the air-bags may break the windshield as thevehicle buckles. In vehicles with a pas-senger airbag the windshield may also bedamaged by absorbing some of the forceof the inflating airbag.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

! The SRS airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver side andfront passenger side seat belt sys-tems. The front seat occupants canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. For in-structions and precautions concern-ing the seat belt system, see “Seatbelts” on page 33 in this section.

! Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing front airbags. An infant or childwho is too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 53 in thissection.

! Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat because the force of therapid inflation of the front passen-ger airbag can cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Move seatfully back

! A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible, because the force ofthe deploying front passenger air-bag could cause death or seriousinjury to the child.

! On vehicles with side airbags, donot allow the child to lean againstthe front door or around the frontdoor even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbags inflate,because the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

! For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page53 in this section.

! Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean over the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront airbags inflate with consider-able speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured. Sit up straight and well backin the seat, and always use yourseat belt properly.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Do not allow a child to stand up orto kneel on the front passengerseat, since the front airbag inflateswith considerable speed and force.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured.

! Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 53 in this sec-tion.

! Do not put objects or your pets onor in front of the dashboard orsteering wheel pad that houses thefront airbag system. They might re-strict inflation or cause death orserious injury as they are projectedrearward by the force of deployingairbags. Likewise, the driver andfront passenger should not hold ob-jects in their arms or on theirknees.

! Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover or front pas-senger airbag cover, front passen-ger airbag, airbag sensor assembly.Doing so may cause sudden SRSfront airbag inflation or disable thesystem, which could result in deathor serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepairs and modifications.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



! Modification of the front end struc-ture

! Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

! Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

This SRS front airbag system has aservice reminder indicator to inform thedriver of operating problems. If either ofthe following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction of the airbags.Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.


! The light comes on while driving.


! The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

! The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

! The pad section of the steering wheelor front passenger airbag cover(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags work together with theseat belts to help reduce injury by inflat-ing. The SRS side airbags help to reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s or front pas-senger’s chest. The SRS side airbag onthe passenger seat is activated even withno passenger in the front seat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seat belt restraintsystem by the driver and front passengerwhen the SRS airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags inflate with consid-erable force. To avoid potential deathor serious injury when they inflate,the driver and front passenger must:

! Wear their seat belts properly.

! Remain properly seated with theirback upright and against the seat atall times.

SRS side airbags

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags are operat-ing properly.


The SRS side airbag system may notactivate if the vehicle is subjected to acollision from the side at certainangles, or a collision to the side of thevehicle body other than the passengercompartment as shown in the illustra-tion.

The SRS side airbags are designed toinflate when the passenger compartmentarea suffers a severe impact from theside.

For the safety of all occupants, alwayswear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are not designedto inflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low−speed sidecollision.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The SRS side airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.


2. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

3. Side airbag sensors


The SRS side airbag system is controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side airbagsensor triggers the side airbag inflators.At this time a chemical reaction in theinflators quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the lateral mo-tion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-mally harmless; however, for those whohave delicate skin, it may cause a minorskin irritation. Be sure to wash off anyresidue as soon as possible to preventany potential skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happen in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats may be hot for several min-utes, but the airbags themselves will notbe hot. The airbags are designed to inflateonly once.

CAUTION

! The SRS side airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driverside and front passenger side seatbelt systems. To ensure maximumprotection in an accident, the driverand all passengers in the vehiclemust wear their seat belts properly.Wearing a seat belt properly duringan accident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. Forinstructions and precautions con-cerning the seat belt system, see“Seat belts” on page 33 in this sec-tion.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 53 in thissection.

! Do not allow a child to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the front door or the areaof the seat from which the side air-bag deploys even if he/she isseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbaginflates, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page53 in this section.

! Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or be seriouslyinjured. Special care should be tak-en especially when you have asmall child in the vehicle.

! Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of the frontseats on vehicles with side airbags.

! Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

! Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of front seats withside airbags. Such changes maydisable the system or cause theside airbags to inflate accidentally,resulting in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer if youconsider modifications of this kind.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag system in somecases.



! Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

! Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

This SRS side airbag system has aservice reminder indicator to inform thedriver of operating problems. If either ofthe following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction of the airbags.Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.



’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)



! The SRS side airbags have been in-flated.

! The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags to inflate.

! The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Toyota strongly urges the use of childrestraint systems for children smallenough to use them.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 33 for details.

CAUTION

! For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

! Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear−facing child restraint systemis installed on the front seat.

! Unless it is unavoidable, do notinstall a forward−facing child re-straint system on the front seat.



! Make sure that you have compliedwith all installation instructions pro-vided by the child restraintmanufacturer and that the system isproperly secured.

A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

—Child restraint system

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

! Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear−facing child restraint systemis installed on the front seat.

! Unless it is unavoidable, do notinstall a forward−facing child re-straint system on the front seat.



! After installing the child restraintsystem, make sure it is secured inplace following the manufacturer’sinstructions. If it is not restrainedsecurely, it may cause death or se-rious injury to the child in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 65 in this section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 67 in this section.

—Types of child restraintsystem

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat is used in rear−facingposition only.

—Installation with seat belt

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION


! Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of thefront seats. This can cause death orserious injury to a child and frontpassenger in case of a suddenbraking or a collision.

! If your driving position is not satis-factory, install the child restraintsystem on the rear right seat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

! After inserting the tab, make surethat the tab and buckle are locked,and that the lap and shoulder por-tions of the belt are not twisted.


! If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from injury. Contact yourToyota dealer immediately. Do notuse the child restraint system untilthe seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to makesure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle−release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat is used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depend-ing on the child’s age and size. Wheninstalling, follow the manufacturer’s in-struction about the applicable child’sage and size as well as directions forinstalling the child restraint system.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION


Move seatfully back



’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)



! If your driving position is not satis-factory, install the child restraintsystem on the rear right seat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION




’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted slightly, it cannot be ex-tended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to makesure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle−release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat is used in forward−fac-ing position only.

Move seatfully back

CAUTION


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)



1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and child fol-lowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page33 for details.

CAUTION

! Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s shoulder. Fail-ure to do so could reduce theamount of protection in an accidentand cause serious injuries in a col-lision.

! Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended. Keep the lap beltpositioned as low on a child’s hipsas possible.

! For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.


! Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)



2. To remove the booster seat, press thebuckle−release button and allow thebelt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

—Using a top strap

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets on the luggagecompartment to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachrear seating position.

This symbol indicates the location of theanchor bracket.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Outside anchor brackets only—Remove the head restraint.

2. Open the lid of the anchor bracket.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


3. Securely fasten the child restraintsystem with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 53 in this section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

4. Outside anchor brackets only—Replace the head restraint.

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225specifications are installed in the rearseat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS225 specification can be fixed tothese anchorages. In this case, it is notnecessary to fix the child restraint systemwith a seat belt on the vehicle.

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Type A Type B

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Widen the clearance between theseat cushion and seatback a littleand confirm the position of the low-er anchorages near the tag on theseatback.

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps ontothe anchorages and tighten the lowerstraps.

Type B—

1. Widen the clearance between theseat cushion and seatback a littleand confirm the position of the low-er anchorages near the tag on theseatback.

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchor-ages.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 65 in this section.)

For the installation details, refer to theinstruction manual equipped with eachproduct.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

! When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages andthat the seat belt is not caught.

! Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions tomake sure it is secure. Follow allthe installation instructions pro-vided by its manufacturer.


To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, push down thelock release lever, tilt the steeringwheel to the desired angle and returnthe lever to its original position.

CAUTION

! Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. It maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

! After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

Tilt steering wheel

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s side.It is a convex mirror with a curved sur-face. Any object seen in a convex mirrorwill look smaller and farther away thanwhen seen in a flat mirror.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

To adjust the rear view mirror, simplyoperate the control lever.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

Outside rear view mirrors——Rear view mirror remotecontrol

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol

Anti−glare inside rear viewmirror

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the ignition key is inserted andturned on, the inside rear view mirror al-ways turns on in the automatic functionmode.

The indicator illuminates to show you thatthe function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off the automatic function, pushand release the “ ” switch. The indica-tor light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic function again,push and release the “ ” switch. Theindicator light will turn on.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take a little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION


Auto anti−glare inside rearview mirror

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To ensure correct functioning of ananti−glare mirror sensor located on theback side of the mirror, do not touchor cover the sensor with your finger ora piece of cloth, etc.

Driver’s side

Front passenger’s side

Driver’s side only—To use the vanitymirror, open the cover.

Vanity mirrors

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and Defogger

Headlights and turn signals 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency flashers 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front fog lights 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior/instrument panel light control 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal lights 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wipers and washer 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window wiper and washer 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window defogger 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 4

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


For U.S.A.

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

For Canada—The tail light indicator (greenlight) on the instrument panel will tell youthat the tail lights are on.

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

For U.S.A.—The headlight low beam indi-cator light (green light) on the instrumentpanel will tell you that the low beams areon.

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer will remind you to turn the lightsoff when the driver’s door is opened if youremove the key with the headlight switchon.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime running light system (for U.S.A.)

Daytime running light system can make iteasier for others to see the front of yourvehicle during the day. This system canbe helpful in many different driving condi-tions, but they can be especially helpfulin the short periods after dawn and beforesunset.

This system will make your headlightscome on at a reduced brightness when:

! The engine is running.

! The parking brake is released.

! The headlight/turn signal lever knob isin the “OFF” position.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob tothe position 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turnthe headlights to full intensity for nightdriving.

The headlights automatically switch to fullor reduced intensity depending on thedarkness of the surroundings when thedaytime running light system is activated.Also, the other exterior lights and instru-ment panel lights automatically turn on oroff.

Headlights and turn signals

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The daytime running light control sensoris on the top of the driver’s side instru-ment panel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

Daytime running light system (for Canada)

Daytime running light system can make iteasier for others to see the front of yourvehicle during the day. This system canbe helpful in many different driving condi-tions, but they can be especially helpfulin the short periods after dawn and beforesunset.

This system will make your headlightscome on at a reduced brightness when:

! The engine is running.

! The parking brake is released.

! The headlight/turn signal lever knob isin the “OFF” position or position 1.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob tothe position 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turnthe headlights to full intensity for nightdriving.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 257 in Section 7−3.

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

Emergency flashers

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come ononly when the headlights are on lowbeam.

OFFON

DOOR

INTERIOR LIGHTS

To turn on the interior light, turn thedial.

The interior light has the following posi-tions:

OFF—Turns the light off.

ON—Keeps the light on all the time.

DOOR—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors, back door or glass hatchis opened. The light goes off when all theside doors, back door and glass hatch areclosed.

Illuminated entry system

With the dial in the DOOR position, thelight comes on when any side door, backdoor or glass hatch is opened. After allthe side doors, back door and glass hatchare closed, the light remains on for about15 seconds and then goes out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes out immediately:

! All the side doors, back door and glasshatch are closed when the ignition keyis in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

! The ignition key is turned to the “ACC”or “ON” after all the side doors, backdoor and glass hatch are closed.

! All the side doors and back door arelocked when the glass hatch is closedand the light is still on.

When any side door is unlocked with thekey or wireless remote control transmitter,the light comes on for 15 seconds, evenif the door is not opened.

To prevent the battery being discharged,the lights will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the dial in the DOOR positionfor 20 minutes or more.

Front fog lightsInterior/instrument panel lightcontrol

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Fullintensityposition

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the dial.

Full intensity position: This position alwayskeeps the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights at full intensity even when thetail lights/headlights are turned on.

If you have to turn on the tail lights/head-lights in daytime, or if the daytime runninglight control sensor activates in circum-stances such as shade, the brightness ofinstrument cluster will be reduced. In thiscase, set the dial to the full intensity posi-tion.

Type A

Type B

Type C

To turn on the personal light, push theswitch. To turn the light off, push theswitch once again.

Personal lights

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,push the lever up and release it.

With interval adjuster: The “INT TIME”band lets you adjust the wiping time inter-val when the wiper lever is in the intermit-tent position (position 1). Twist the bandupward to increase the time betweensweeps, and downward to decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 257 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

To turn on the rear window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 257 inSection 7−3.

Windshield wipers and washerRear window wiper andwasher

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if therear window is dry. It may scratch theglass.

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the windowsurface. An indicator light will illuminate toindicate the defogger is operating.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefogger off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defogger have operated about 15minutes.

Make sure you turn the defogger off whenthe window is clear. Leaving the defoggeron for a long time could cause the batteryto discharge, especially during stop−and−go driving. The defogger is not designedfor drying rain water or for melting snow.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Rear window defogger

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine coolant temperature gauge 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer and two trip meters 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside temperature gauge 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Low fuellevelwarninglight

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-ating or making turns. This is caused bythe movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

! Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

! Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

! Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

! Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

! Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

! Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 201 inSection 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm ( revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

Tachometer Odometer and two trip meters

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B. The outside temperature is indicated on

the display when the ignition switch ison.

The displayed temperature ranges from−30"C (−22"F) up to 50"C (122"F).

If there is any abnormality in the connec-tion of the outside air temperature sensor,“−−” will appear on the display. If “−−”appears on the display, contact your Toyo-ta dealer.

There may be a case that “−−” appearsmomentarily when the ignition is quicklyturned to “ON”. It is normal if it goes outsoon.

(a) If parking brakeis off, stopimmediately andcontact Toyotadealer.

(b) Fasten driver’s seat belt.

If the indicator orbuzzer comes on...

(d) Stop and check.

(indicator and buzzer)

(e) Stop and check.

or

Do this.

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seatbelt.

Outside temperature gaugeService reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


(h) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

or

(g) Fill up tank.

(f) Take vehicle toToyota dealer.

or

Do this.If the indicator orbuzzer comes on...

Low fuellevel warninglight

*1: This symbol equipped only on vehiclessold in Canada.

(l) Remove key.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealerimmediately.

(m) Turn off lights.Light reminderbuzzer

Key reminderbuzzer

(i) Close all sidedoors, back doorand glass hatch.

(k) Add washer fluid.

*1

Do this.If the indicator orbuzzer comes on...

(a) Brake System Warning Light

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.

! When the parking brake is applied...

Vehicles with anti−lock brake system—

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position even after the parking brakeis released.

! When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

! The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

Vehicles with anti−lock brake system—

! The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, immediately stop your vehicleat a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

! The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may notwork properly and your stoppingdistance will become longer. De-press the brake pedal firmly andbring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

Vehicles with anti−lock brake sys-tem—

! The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

This light and buzzer remind you tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes andbuzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt isnot fastened. Unless the driver fastens thebelt, the light keeps flashing and thebuzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re-minder Light

This light reminds you to buckle up thefront passenger’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes if apassenger sits in the front passenger seatand does not fasten the seat belt. Howev-er, if a front passenger uses an additionalseat cushion, the light may not flash evenwhen the seat belt is not buckled up.

If luggage load is placed on the frontpassenger seat, depending on its weightand how it is placed on the seat, built−insensors in the seat cushion may detectthe pressure, causing the reminder light tokeep flashing.

(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is beingdischarged.

If it comes on while you are driving, thereis a problem somewhere in the chargingsystem.

The engine ignition will continue to oper-ate, however, until the battery is dis-charged. Turn off the air conditioning,blower, radio,etc., and drive directly to thenearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the enginedrive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the engine starts. Thismeans that the warning light system isoperating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

! Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

! Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp will not go off even after theseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

! There is a problem somewhere in theengine, emission control system, auto-matic transmission electrical system orwarning light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a stateemission inspection if the malfunctionindicator lamp remains on. Contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 232in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

(h) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on with the ignition keyturned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if the system malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

! The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

! The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the sidedoors, back door and glass hatch arecompletely closed.

(j) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.After about 6 seconds, the light will gooff. This means the systems of the air-bag and front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensors, driver’s seatposition sensor, driver’s seat belt buckleswitch, front seat belt pretensioner assem-blies, inflators, warning light, interconnect-ing wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle.

! The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on.


(k) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light (For vehicles sold inCanada)

The light warns that the windshield washerfluid level is too low. Add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity. (For instructions,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 257 inSection 7−3.)

(l) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you to remove thekey when you open the driver’s door withthe ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”position.

(m) Light Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer will sound if the headlightswitch is left on and the driver’s door isopened with the key removed from theignition switch.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and low windshieldwasher fluid level warning light)*1

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors, back dooror glass hatch.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door/hatch.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The “ABS” warning light goesoff after a few seconds. The SRSwarning light goes off after about 6seconds.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

*1: When equipped.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brake

Ignition switch with steering lock 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic transmission 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual transmission 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking brake 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cruise control 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 183 in Section3.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn it from“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. On vehicleswith an automatic transmission, the selec-tor lever must be in the “P” position be-fore pushing the key.

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

CAUTION

For manual transmission:

Never remove the key when the ve-hicle is moving, as this will lock thesteering wheel and result in loss ofsteering control.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steeringlock

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position and the lock re-lease button depressed).

(a) Selector lever

P: Parking, engine starting andkey removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission

Lock release buttonTo prevent misshifting

With the brake pedal depressed,shift while holding the lockrelease button in. (The ignition switch must be in“ON” position.)

Shift while holding thelock release button in.

Shift normally.

Selector lever

Overdriveswitch

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


(b) Overdrive switch

You can select either third gear (withoverdrive off) or fourth gear (with over-drive on) by pushing this switch.

To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.The “O/D OFF” indicator light should comeon. To turn the overdrive on again, pushthe switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicatorlight should go off.

Always drive your vehicle with the over-drive on for better fuel economy andquieter driving.

If the engine is turned off when the over-drive is off and restarted, the overdrivewill automatically be on.

Vehicles with cruise control—When thecruise control is being used, even if youdownshift the transmission by pushing andreleasing the overdrive switch, enginebraking will not be enabled because thecruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 101 in thissection.

(c) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 184 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always turn the overdrive on for betterfuel economy and quieter driving. If theengine coolant temperature is low, thetransmission will not shift into the over-drive gear even with the overdrive on.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

! Push the overdrive switch. The “O/DOFF” indicator light will come on andthe transmission will downshift to thirdgear.

! Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models105 km/h (65 mph)

Four−wheel drive models96 km/h (59 mph)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models49 km/h (30 mph)

Four−wheel drive models48 km/h (29 mph)

Vehicles with cruise control—When thecruise control is being used, even if youdownshift the transmission by pushing andreleasing the overdrive switch, enginebraking will not be enabled because thecruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 101 in thissection.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

(e) Using “2” and “L” positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, youcan start the vehicle in motion as with thelever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “2”, the vehiclewill start in first gear and automaticallyshift to second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

! Be careful not to over−rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

1ZZ−FE engine“2” 110 km/h (68 mph). . . . . . . . . “L” 60 km/h (37 mph). . . . . . . . . .

2ZZ−GE engine“2” 120 km/h (74 mph). . . . . . . . . “L” 67 km/h (41 mph). . . . . . . . . .

! Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“2” or “L” position. This may causesevere automatic transmission dam-age from overheating. To preventsuch damage, “D” position shouldbe used in hill climbing or hardtowing.

(f) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


(g) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(h) Good driving practice

! If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between third gear and over-drive when climbing a gentle slope, theoverdrive should be turned off. Be sureto turn the switch on immediately after-ward.

! When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse overdrive.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(i) Rocking your vehicle if stuck

CAUTION

If your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then you mayattempt to rock the vehicle free bymoving it forward and backward. Donot attempt this procedure if peopleor objects are anywhere near the ve-hicle. During the rocking operationthe vehicle may suddenly move for-ward or backward as it becomes un-stuck, causing injury or damage tonearby people or objects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

! Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

! If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

(j) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 216 in Section 4.

5−speed

6−speed

The shift pattern is as shown above.

Press the clutch pedal down fully whileshifting, and then release it slowly. Do notrest your foot on the pedal while driving,because it will cause clutch trouble. Anddo not use the clutch to hold the vehiclewhen stopped on an uphill grade—use theparking brake.

Recommended shifting speeds

The transmission is fully synchronized andupshifting or downshifting is easy.

For the best compromise between fueleconomy and vehicle performance, youshould upshift or downshift at the followingspeeds:

5−speedGear km/h (mph)

1 to 2 or 2 to 1 24 (15)2 to 3 or 3 to 2 40 (25)3 to 4 or 4 to 3 64 (40)4 to 5 or 5 to 4 72 (45)


1 to 2 or 2 to 1 24 (15)2 to 3 or 3 to 2 40 (25)3 to 4 or 4 to 3 64 (40)4 to 5 or 5 to 4 72 (45)5 to 6 or 6 to 5 80 (50)

Manual transmission

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Downshift to the appropriate gear if accel-eration is needed when you are cruisingbelow the above downshifting speeds.

Upshifting too soon or downshifting toolate will cause lugging and, possibly, ping-ing. Regularly revving the engine to maxi-mum speed in each gear will cause ex-cessive engine wear and high fuelconsumption.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slowertraffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-essary. Make sure you observe the follow-ing maximum allowable speeds in eachgear:


1 58 (36)2 98 (61)3 142 (88)4 180 (112)


1 62 (38)2 96 (60)3 133 (83)4 169 (105)5 210 (130)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are goingfaster than the maximum allowablespeed for the next lower gear.

Good driving practice

! If it is difficult to shift into reverse, putthe transmission in neutral, release theclutch pedal momentarily, and then tryagain.

! When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse fifth gear (5−speed models) orsixth gear (6−speed models).

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

NOTICE

Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before shifting into reverse.

Type A

Type B

Parking brake

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Pull up the lever. For better hold-ing power, first depress the brake pedaland hold it while setting the parkingbrake.To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),press the lock release button (2), and low-er (3).

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed over 40km/h (25 mph) even with your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades within the limits of engineperformance, although a slight speedchange may occur when driving up ordown the grades. On steeper hills, agreater speed change will occur so it isbetter to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

! To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) orwinding roads.

! Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

TURNING ON THE SYSTEM

To operate the cruise control, push the“CRUISE ON−OFF” switch. This turns thesystem on. The indicator light in theinstrument panel shows that you can nowset the vehicle at a desired cruisingspeed. Another push will turn the systemcompletely off.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-gagement, keep the “CRUISE ON−OFF” switch off when not using thecruise control.

Cruise control

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

On vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “SET/COAST”direction and release it. This sets the ve-hicle at that speed. If the speed is notsatisfactory, tap the lever up for a fasterspeed, or tap it down for a slower speed.Each tap changes the set speed by 1.6km/h (1.0 mph). You can now take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CAUTION

For manual transmission:

While driving with the cruise controlon, do not shift to neutral withoutdepressing the clutch pedal, as thismay cause engine racing or overrev-ving.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL”direction and releasing it.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

c. Depressing the clutch pedal (manualtransmission).

d. Pushing “CRUISE ON−OFF” switch.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the presetspeed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “RES/ACC” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held up, the vehicle will graduallygain speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “SET/COAST” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “SET/COAST”direction and hold it. Release the leverwhen the desired speed is attained. Whilethe lever is held down, the vehicle speedwill gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “SET/COAST” direction.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


On vehicles with automatic transmission,even if you turn off the overdrive switchwith the cruise control on, engine brakingwill not be applied because the cruisecontrol is not cancelled. To decrease thevehicle speed, reset to a slower speedwith the cruise control lever or depressthe brake pedal. If you use the brakepedal, cruise control is cancelled.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe control lever or by depressing thebrake pedal or clutch pedal, pushing thelever up in the “RES/ACC” direction willrestore the speed set prior to cancellation.

However, once the vehicle speed falls be-low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the presetspeed will not be resumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in theinstrument cluster flashes when using thecruise control, press the “CRUISE ON−OFF” switch to turn the system off andthen press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

! The indicator light does not come on.

! The indicator light flashes again.

! The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSCar audio systemReference 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car audio system operating hintsts 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to theseparate “Owner’s Manual for Navigation System”.

SECTION 1− 7

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Type 1: AM·FM ETR radio/compact discplayer

Type 2: AM·FM ETR radio/cassette player/compact disc player

Type 3: AM·FM ETR radio/compact discauto changer

Reference

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR/VOL” or “PWR” to turn theaudio system on and off.

You can turn on each player by insertinga cassette tape or compact disc.

The audio system will change to the radiomode when a cassette or a compact discis ejected during play.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM/FM”, “CD/AUX” or “CD/TAPE” ifthe system is already on but you want toswitch from one function to another.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange and bass levels. Infact, different kinds of music and vocalprograms usually sound better with differ-ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has a mast type antenna.

To remove the antenna, carefully turn itcounterclockwise.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed before driv-ing your Toyota through an automaticcar wash.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player anddo not insert anything other than cas-sette tapes into the slot, or the tapeplayer may be damaged.

Using your audio system——Some basics

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1 and type 2)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. (The player willautomatically eject a disc if the label sideis down.) The compact disc player willplay from track 1 through the end of thedisc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a compactdisc into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

YOUR COMPACT DISC AUTO CHANGER(type 3)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button, wait for the load/eject status lightto turn green, then gently push the discin with the label side up. (The player willautomatically eject a disc if the label sideis down.) The compact disc auto changerwill play from track 1 through the end ofthe disc. Then it will play from track 1 ofthe next disc.

The changer is intended for use with 12cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

! Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc auto changer. In-sert only one compact disc into slotat a time.

! Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a com-pact disc into the slot.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallisting that follows.

—Controls and features!Type 1

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button:

1. Tune in the desired station. (See“TUNE” or “SEEK” or “SCAN”.)

If you desire to select the equalizationthat best suits the type of station se-lected. (See “EQ”.)

2. Push and hold the preset button untilyou hear a beep—this will set the sta-tion and EQ setting to the button. Thepreset number will appear on the dis-play.

3. Repeat the above steps for each but-ton.

To tune to a preset station: Push the but-ton for the station you want. The buttonnumber and station frequency will appearon the display.

RDS stations will be preset to the buttonswhen any of RDS stations is received inthe FM mode.

To preset a program type to a button:

1. Push the “AM/FM” button to select“FM1” or “FM2”.

2. Push “PROG TYPE” button to activatethe program type mode. “P−TYPE” willappear on the display.

3. Turn the select knob to select the de-sired program type.

4. Push and hold the preset button untilyou hear a beep—this will set the pro-gram type to the preset button.


To tune to a station with a desired pro-gram type: While in a program type mode,push the preset button for the programtype you want. The program type will ap-pear on the display and the radio will tunethe station with strongest signal and thedesired program type.

Each button can store one AM and twoFM stations, and two RDS program types.(The display will show “AM”, “FM1” or“FM2” when you push the “AM/FM” but-ton.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button toeject a compact disc.

If the disc is not removed after 25 sec-onds, the disc will be automatically pulledback into the receiver.

/ (Reverse/Fast forward buttons)

Push and hold the “ ” button to fastforward within a track. “FDW >>” andelapsed time will appear on the display.Push and hold the “ ” button to reversewithin a track. “REW <<” and elapsedtime will appear on the display.

When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.

AM/FM

Push the “AM/FM” button to switch be-tween the AM and FM band. “AM”, “FM1”or “FM2” will appear on the display.

Also, push this button to switch from thecompact disc operation to the radio.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Alternate Frequency

To turn the AF mode on, push and holdthe “AM/FM” button until you hear a beep.“AF ON” will appear on the display.

When reception condition worsen, the au-dio system will select the RDS stationwhich has the same PI (Program Identifi-cation) code.

To turn the AF mode off, push and holdthe “AM/FM” button again until you heara beep. “AF OFF” will appear on the dis-play.

BAL/FADE (Sound balance adjustmentfunction)

This button is used to adjust the soundbalance between the front and rear, andthe right and left speakers.

For front/rear adjustment, push the “BAL/FADE” button repeatedly until “FAD” ap-pears on the display. Then turn the“TUNE/SELECT” knob to adjust the front/rear balance.

For left/right adjustment, push the “BAL/FADE” button repeatedly until “BAL” ap-pears on the display. Then turn the“TUNE/SELECT” knob to adjust the left/right balance.

To return to the middle position balances,push and hold the “BAL/FADE” button fortwo seconds.

CD/AUX (Compact Disc/Auxiliary)

Push the “CD/AUX” button to switch fromradio to compact disc operation. A discmust already be loaded in the player.

Error codes

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display the following error mes-sages.

“CHECK CD”:

" The road is too rough. The disc shouldplay when the road is smoother.

" The disc is dirty, scratched, wet orupside down.

" The air is very humid. If so, wait aboutan hour and try again.

If the disc is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good compactdisc.

“PLAYER ERROR”: There is trouble in-side the system. Eject the disc. Set thedisc again.

If malfunction is not rectified, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

EQ (Equalizer)

Your audio system can store five differentEQ settings so that you will not need toreadjust it every time you listen to a dif-ferent program.

To use a preset setting:

Push the “EQ” button repeatedly until theEQ number you want to use appears onthe display.

To change a preset EQ setting:

1. Use the “TONE” button and the“TUNE/SELECT” knob to select thedesired equalization. (For details, see“TONE”.)

2. Push and hold the “EQ” button until“SELECT EQ #” appears on the dis-play.

3. Push the “EQ” button repeatedly orturn the “TUNE/SELECT” knob to selectthe desired preset EQ number.

4. Push and hold the “EQ” button until“EQ SAVED” appears on the displayand you hear a beep. This EQ settingis saved to that number.

HR/MIN (Hours/minutes adjustment)

These buttons are used to adjust theclock time. (For details, see “Clock” onpage 150 in Section 1−9.)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


INFO (Information)

When an RDS radio station transmits atext message, “INFO” will be displayed. Atthis time, push the “INFO” button to viewthe text message. If the whole messagedoes not appear on the display, part ofthe message will appear every three sec-onds until the message is completed. Toscroll through the message at your ownspeed, push the “INFO” button consecu-tively. When the whole message has beendisplayed, the message will disappear.The message display will be canceled ifany button that affects the display ispushed. To view the message again, pushthe “INFO” button again.

The RDS audio system saves a messageuntil a new message is received.

If the text message is not available whenyou push “INFO” button, “NO INFO” willappear on the display.

PROG TYPE (Program Types)

To turn on the PTY mode, push the“PROG TYPE” button while receiving anRDS station. The current program type willappear on the display.

You can select one of the following pro-grams by turning the tune knob while thePTY mode is on.

" Any Type

" News

" Inform (Information)

" Sports

" Talk

" Rock

" Cls Rock (Classic rock)

" Adlt Hit (Adult Hits)

" Soft Rck

" Top 40

" Country

" Oldies

" Soft

" Nostalga (Nostalgia)

" Jazz

" classicl (Classical)

" R & B

" Soft R & B

" Language

" Rel Musc (Religious Music)

" Rel Talk (Religious Talk)

" Persnlty (Personality)

" Public

" College

" Weather

Interrupt function

If the radio in on the compact disc mode,the radio will switch to the FM band withthe previous interrupt volume. The pro-gram type and “Int” will appear. If theradio in on the FM mode, the volume willbe adjusted to the previous interrupt vol-ume. To cancel the interrupt function,press “PROG TYPE” or the selected modebutton.

If the radio in on the PTY mode, programtypes, except Any Type, may be selectedas interrupts. To set a program type as aninterrupt, push and hold “PROG TYPE”while a program type is displayed untilyou hear a beep. The asterisk will appearwhen an interrupt is set.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To turn off an interrupt while the radio inon the PTY mode, select the program typemarked with an asterisk. Push and hold“PROG TYPE” until you hear a beep. Theasterisk will disappear.

Note: ALERT! is a special program typeinterrupt that is always on. If an emergen-cy broadcast is received during receptionof anything other than AM broadcasting,“ALERT” appears on the display and thesystem adjust the volume to the interruptvolume.

Setting a PTY station

Program types can be stored to the presetbuttons. For details, see “1 2 3 4 5 6(Preset buttons)”.

Seeking a PTY station

If the radio in on the PTY mode, it willfind and play the next station up or downthe station band within the same programtype. If no PTY station will be found,“NOT FOUND” will appear on the displayand the radio will return to the previousfrequency.

For details, see “SEEK”.

Scanning a PTY station

If the radio in on the PTY mode, it willtune in the next station within the sameprogram type.

For details, see “SCAN”.

PWR/VOL (Power/Volume)

Push “PWR/VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR/VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RCL (Recall)

This button is designed to change the dis-play in each mode.

You can also display the clock by pushingthis button when the ignition switch is off.

Radio

Push the “RCL” button to change the dis-play among the frequency, program ser-vice name and program type name whenRDS station is being received.

To change what is normally shown on thedisplay, push this button repeatedly untilyou see the display you want, then holdthis button until the display flashes andyou hear a beep.

Compact disc player

Push the “RCL” button to change the dis-play between the track number andelapsed time.


RDM (Random)

Push the “RDM” button to listen the trackson the disc in random order. “RDM” willappear on the display. To turn off therandom feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for more than 4 seconds.“P SCAN” will appear on the display andyou hear two beeps. The radio will tunein the next preset station up the band,stay there for 5 seconds, and then moveto the next preset station. To cancel scanand remain on the current station, pushthis button again.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To scan all the frequencies: Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for two seconds. “SCAN”appears on the display and you hear abeep. The radio will find the next stationup the station band, stay there for 5 sec-onds, and then scan again. To cancelscan and remain on the current station,push this button again.

The radio will scan in forward only.

You can also scan only to stations withthe types of programs you want to listento or traffic announcements. (See “PROGTYPE”.)

Compact disc player

Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for more than two seconds.“SCAN” will appear on the display andyou hear a beep. The disc will go to thethe next track and play for 10 seconds,then go on the next track. To select atrack, push this button again.

The compact disc will scan in forwardonly.

SEEK (Seeking)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek a station, quickly push and re-lease either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” but-ton. If you hear a beep, the radio willscan the stations. (See “SCAN”.) Do thisagain to find another station.

You can also seek only to stations withthe types of programs you want to listento or traffic announcements. (See “PROGTYPE”.)

Compact disc player

By using this button, you can skip up ordown to a different track.

Push either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” but-ton repeatedly until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, push the downside of the button one time, quickly.

TONE (Manual tone adjustment function)

Push the “TONE” button to select thebass, midrange or treble tone control posi-tion. (“BASS”, “MID”, “TREB” will appearon the display.) To adjust the tone, turnthe “TUNE/SELECT” knob.

“BASS”: Adjusts low−pitched tones. Thedisplay ranges from −6 to +6.

“MID”: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −6 to +6.

“TREB”: Adjusts high−pitched tones. Thedisplay ranges from −6 to +6.

To adjust all of the tone controls to themiddle position, push and hold the “TONE”button for more than two seconds. “FLAT”will appear on the display.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement(TA) feature on and off.

By pushing the “< >” button, “TRAF” ap-pears on the display and the radio willstart seeking any traffic program station.

When a traffic program station is found,“TRAF” will be displayed (<TRAF>). If notraffic program stations are found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the display.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


After the traffic announcement program isover, the display returns to the previousmode.

If no traffic program station is found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the display for 5seconds and the display returns to theprevious mode. If the “TRAF” button ispushed when the compact disc player ison, the radio will start seeking traffic pro-gram stations. Audio source will changeonly if there is a traffic announcement.

When a “TA” is received, the radio storesthe volume of the previous mode and ad-justs the volume to the previous interruptvolume. During the traffic announcement,you can adjust the volume using the“PWR/VOL”.

The adjusted volume will be used as thenew default interrupt volume. The interruptvolume has a minimum default setting.The stored interrupt volume will be thegreater of the current volume and theminimum default setting. After an interrupt,the radio system will return to the volumethat was active before the interrupt.

TUNE (Tuning)

Your Toyota has an electronic tuning radio(ETR). Turn the knob clockwise to step upthe frequency. Turn the knob counterclock-wise to step down the frequency.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallisting that follows.

—Controls and features!Type 2

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)



1. Tune in the desired station. (See“TUNE” or “SEEK” “SCAN”.)

If you desire to select the equalizationthat best suits the type of station se-lected. (See “EQ”.)



To tune to a preset station: Push the but-ton for the station you want. The buttonnumber and station frequency will appearon the display.




2. Push “PROG TYPE” button to activatethe program type mode. “P−TYPE” willappear on the display.




To tune to a station with a desired pro-gram type: While in a program type mode,push the preset button for the programtype you want. The program type will ap-pear on the display and the radio will tunethe station with strongest signal and thedesired program type.

Each button can store one AM and twoFM stations, and two RDS program types.(The display will show “AM”, “FM1” or“FM2” when you push the “AM/FM” but-ton.)

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette. Push the compact disceject button to eject a compact disc.

Compact disc player only—If the disc isnot removed after 25 seconds, the discwill be automatically pulled back into thereceiver.

(Program)

Push the “ ” button to select the otherside of a cassette tape. The display indi-cates which side is currently selected(“ ” indicates top side, “ ” indicatesbottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

/ (Reverse/Fast forward buttons)

Cassette player

Push the “ ” button to fast forward acassette tape. “FWD >>” will appear onthe display. Push the “ ” button to re-wind a tape. “REV <<” will appear on thedisplay.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To return to playing speed while it is fastforwarding, push the “ ” button; to re-turn to playing speed while it is rewinding,push the “ ” button.

If a tape side rewinds completely, the cas-sette player will stop and then play thatsame side. If a tape fast forwards com-pletely, the cassette player will play theother side of the tape, using the auto−re-verse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold the “ ” button to fastforward within a track. “FWD >>” andelapsed time will appear on the display.Push and hold the “ ” button to reversewithin a track. “REV <<” and elapsed timewill appear on the display.

When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.

AM/FM


Also, push this button to switch from thecassette or compact disc operation to theradio.

Alternate Frequency



To turn the AF mode off, push and holdthe “AM/FM” button again until you heara beep. “AF OFF” will appear on the dis-play.

BAL/FADE (Sound balance adjustmentfunction)

This button is used to adjust the soundbalance between the front and rear, andthe right and left speakers.

For front/rear adjustment, push the “BAL/FADE” button repeatedly until “FAD” ap-pears on the display. Then turn the“TUNE/SELECT” knob to adjust the front/rear balance.

For left/right adjustment, push the “BAL/FADE” button repeatedly until “BAL” ap-pears on the display. Then turn the“TUNE/SELECT” knob to adjust the left/right balance.

To return to the middle position balances,push and hold the “BAL/FADE” button fortwo seconds.

CD (Compact disc player)

Push the “CD/TAPE” button to switch be-tween the compact disc operation and thecassette operation. A disc must alreadybe loaded in the player.

Also, push this button to switch from radioto the compact disc operation or the cas-sette operation.

Error messages


“CHECK CD”:




If the disc is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good compactdisc.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


“PLAYER ERROR”: There is trouble in-side the system. Eject the disc. Set thedisc again.


Dolby# B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby# B Noise Reduction,push “ ”. “DOLBY NR ON” will appearon the display. Push the button again toturn off Dolby# B NR. “DOLBY NR OFF”will appear on the display.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used forrecording the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

EQ (Equalizer)

Your audio system can store five differentEQ settings so that you will not need toreadjust it every time you listen to a dif-ferent program.

To use a preset setting:

Push the “EQ” button repeatedly until theEQ number you want to use appears onthe display.

To change a preset EQ setting:

1. Use the “TONE” button and the “TUNE/SELECT” knob to select the desiredequalization. (For details, see “TONE”.)

2. Push and hold the “EQ” button until“SELECT EQ #” appears on the dis-play.

3. Push the “EQ” button repeatedly orturn the “TUNE/SELECT” knob to selectthe desired preset EQ number.

4. Push and hold the “EQ” button until“EQ SAVED” appears on the displayand you hear a beep. This EQ settingis saved to that number.

HR/MIN (Hours/minutes adjustment)

These buttons are used to adjust theclock time. (For details, see “Clock” onpage 150 in Section 1−9.)

INFO (Information)




’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


PROG TYPE (Program Types)

To turn on the PTY mode, push the“PROG TYPE” button while receiving anRDS station. The current program type willappear on the display.

You can select one of the following pro-grams by turning the tune knob while thePTY mode is on.

" Any Type

" News


" Sports

" Talk

" Rock

" Cls Rock (Classic rock)


" Soft Rck

" Top 40

" Country

" Oldies

" Soft


" Jazz


" R & B

" Soft R & B

" Language




" Public

" College

" Weather

Interrupt function

If the radio in on the compact disc mode,the radio will switch to the FM band withthe previous interrupt volume. The pro-gram type and “Int” will appear. If theradio in on the FM mode, the volume willbe adjusted to the previous interrupt vol-ume. To cancel the interrupt function,press “PROG TYPE” or the selected modebutton.

If the radio in on the PTY mode, programtypes, except Any Type, may be selectedas interrupts. To set a program type as aninterrupt, push and hold “PROG TYPE”while a program type is displayed untilyou hear a beep. The asterisk will appearwhen an interrupt is set.

To turn off an interrupt while the radio inon the PTY mode, select the program typemarked with an asterisk. Push and hold“PROG TYPE” until you hear a beep. Theasterisk will disappear.



Program types can be stored to the presetbuttons. For details, see “1 2 3 4 5 6(Preset buttons)”.


If the radio in on the PTY mode, it willfind and play the next station up or downthe station band within the same programtype. If no PTY station will be found,“NOT FOUND” will appear on the displayand the radio will return to the previousfrequency.


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)



If the radio in on the PTY mode, it willtune in the next station within the sameprogram type.




RCL (Recall)

This button is designed to change the dis-play in each mode.

You can also display the clock by pushingthis button when the ignition switch is off.

Radio

Push the “RCL” button to change the dis-play among the frequency, program ser-vice name and program type name whenRDS station is being received.


Compact disc player

Push the “RCL” button to change the dis-play between the track number andelapsed time.


RDM (Random)

Push the “RDM” button to listen the trackson the disc in random order. “RDM” willappear on the display. To turn off therandom feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio


To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SEEK/SCAN” buttonfrom more than 4 seconds. “P SCAN” willappear on the display and you hear twobeeps. The radio will tune in the nextpreset station up the band, stay there for5 seconds, and then move to the nextpreset station. To cancel scan and remainon current station, push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for two seconds. “SCAN”will appear on the display and you heara beep. The radio will find the next stationup the station band, stay there for 5 se-conds, and then scan again. To cancelscan and remain on current station, pushthis button again.

The radio will scan in forward only.

You can also scan only to stations withthe types of programs you want to listento or traffic announcements. (See “PROGTYPE”.)

Compact disc player

Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for more than two seconds.“SCAN” will appear on the display andyou hear a beep. The disc will go to thethe next track and play for 10 seconds,then go on the next track. To select atrack, push this button again.

The compact disc will scan in forwardonly.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Cassette player

Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for more than two seconds.“SCAN” appears on the display and youhear a beep. The tape will go to the nexttrack and play for 10 seconds, then go onto the next track.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

The tape will scan in forward only.

SEEK (Seeking)

Radio


To seek a station, quickly push and re-lease either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” but-ton. Do this again to find another station.

You can also seek only to stations withthe types of programs you want to listento or traffic announcements. (See “PROGTYPE”.)

Cassette player

By using the “SEEK/SCAN” button, youcan skip up or down to a different track.

You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.

Push the up or down side of the button.“SEEK +1” or “SEEK −1” will appear onthe display.

Next, push either side of this button untilthe number on the display reaches thenumber of tracks you want to skip.

When counting the number of tracks youwant to rewind, remember to count thecurrent track as well. For example, if youwant to rewind to a song that is two be-fore the song you are listening to, pushon the down side of the button until“SEEK −3” appears on the display.

If you have pushed this button more thanyou wanted to, push the other side of thebutton. The track number will be reduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of tracksremaining on the current cassette side.

" After the beginning of the tape isreached, the player will automaticallystart playing the same side.

" After the end of the tape is reached,the player will automatically reversesides and start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for this button towork correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spokenword, live, or classical recordings.

Compact disc player

By using the “SEEK/SCAN” button, youcan skip up or down to a different track.

Push either side of this button until thenumber of the track you want to listen toappears on the display. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the currenttrack, push the down side of the buttonone time, quickly.

TAPE

Push the “CD/TAPE” button to switch be-tween the cassette operation and the com-pact disc operation. A cassette must al-ready be loaded in the player.

Also, push this button to switch from radioto the cassette operation or the compactdisc operation.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Error messages


“TIGHT TAPE”: This message is dis-played when the tape is tight and theplayer cannot turn the tape hubs. Removethe tape. Hold the tape with the open enddown and try to turn the right hub coun-terclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tapeover and repeat. If the hubs do not turneasily, your tape may be damaged andshould not be used in the player. Try anew tape to make sure your player isworking properly.

“BROKEN TAPE”: This message is dis-played when the tape is broken. Try anew tape.

“CLEAN PLAYER”: This message is dis-played when the cassette tape playerneed to be cleaned. It will still play tapes,but you should clean it as soon as pos-sible to prevent damage to the tapes andplayer. After cleaning the player, push andhold the cassette tape eject button untilyou hear a beep. “CLEANED” will appearon the display.

“WRAPPED TAPE”: This message is dis-played when the tape is wrapped aroundthe tape head. Attempt to get the cassetteout. Try a new tape.


Cut tape bypass function

When you use the endless type tape(head cleaner tape etc.), you must deacti-vate the tape bypass feature.

To deactivate this feature:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or“ON” position, and the audio is off.

2. Push and hold the “TAPE/CD” buttonfor more than two seconds. “READY”will appear on the display.

3. Insert the endless type tape.

The tape bypass feature will stay deacti-vated until the cassette tape eject buttonis pushed.

TONE (Manual tone adjustment function)

Push the “TONE” button to select thebass, midrange or treble tone control posi-tion. (”BASS”, “MID”, “TREB” will appearon the display.) To adjust the tone, turn“TUNE/SELECT” knob.

“BASS”: Adjusts low−pitched tones. Thedisplay ranges from −6 to +6.

“MID”: Adjusts mid−pithed tones. The dis-play ranges from −6 to +6.

“TREB”: Adjusts high−pitched tones. Thedisplay ranges from −6 to +6.

To adjusts all of the tone controls to themiddle position, push and hold the “TONE”button for more than two seconds. “FLAT”will appear on the display.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


TRAF (Traffic)


By pushing the “< >” button, “TRAF” ap-pears on the display and the radio willstart seeking any traffic program station.



If no traffic program station is found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the display for 5seconds and the display returns to theprevious mode. If the “TRAF” button ispushed when the cassette player or thecompact disc player is on, the radio willstart seeking traffic program stations. Au-dio source will change only if there is atraffic announcement.



TUNE (Tuning)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallisting that follows.

!Type 3

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset or disc selectionbuttons)

Radio



1. Tune in the desired station. (See“TUNE”, “SEEK” or “SCAN”.)

If you desire to select the equalizationthat best suits the type of station se-lected, push the “AUTO EQ” button.(See “AUTO EQ”.)



To tune to a preset station: Push the but-ton for the station you want. The presetbutton number and station frequency willappear on the display.




2. Push “P·TYPE” button to activate theprogram type mode. “P·TYPE” will ap-pear on the display.




To tune to a station with a desired pro-gram type: while in a program type mode,push the preset button for the programtype you want. The program type will ap-pear on the display and the radio will tunethe station with strongest signal and thedesired program type.

Each button can store one AM and twoFM stations, and two RDS program types.(The display will show “AM”, “FM1” or“FM2” when you push “AM/FM”.)

Compact disc auto changer

These buttons are used to select the discwhile in the compact disc mode.

To select the disc, push the number but-ton you want to listen to.

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs. To eject the current com-pact disc, push and release the eject but-ton. To eject a specific disc while in thecompact disc mode, push the number but-ton of the disc you want to eject thenpush and release the eject button. Toeject all discs, press and hold the ejectbutton until you hear two beeps. The lastcompact disc played before pushing thebutton will be ejected first.

When the eject button is pushed,“REMOVED CD” will be displayed and onebeep will sound. If the disc is notremoved within 25 seconds, the disc willbe automatically pulled back into thereceiver.

If the changer is empty when the ejectbutton is pushed, three beeps will sound.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If you try to push the disc back into thereceiver before 25−second time period iscomplete, the receiver will try to eject thedisc again when the 25−second time peri-od is complete.

Do not repeatedly push the eject button toeject a disc after you have tried to pushit in manually. The receiver 25−secondeject timer will reset at each push ofeject, which will cause the receiver not toeject the disc until the 25−second timeperiod has elapsed.

Once the player stops and the disc isejected, remove the disc. After removingthe disc, push the “PWR/VOL” knob offand then on again. This will clear thedisc−sensing feature and enable discs tobe loaded into the player again.

While the ignition is in “LOCK”, you caneject one or all discs but you cannot rein-sert them.

<< REV FDW >> (Reverse/Fast−forwardbutton)

If you want to fast−forward or reverse acompact disc track, push and hold the“>>” (fast−forward) or “<< (reverse) button.When you release the button, the compactdisc auto changer will resume playing.The display will show elapsed time.

AM/FM


Also, push this button to switch from thecompact disc operation to the radio.

Alternate Frequency function



To turn off the AF mode off, push andhold the “AM/FM” button again until youhear a beep. “AF OFF” will appear on thedisplay.

AUDIO (manual tone and sound balanceadjustment function)

Manual tone adjustment function—

This knob is used to adjust the tonemanually.

Manual tone operations are saved into thecustom setting of the equalization. (See“AUTO EQ”.)

For low−pitch tone adjustment, push the“AUDIO” knob repeatedly until “BASS”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“BASS −6” to “BASS +6”.

For middle−pitch tone adjustment, pushthe “AUDIO” knob repeatedly until “MID”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from “MID−6” to “MID +6”.

For high−pitch tone adjustment, push the“AUDIO” knob repeatedly until “TREB”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“TREB −6” to “TREB +6”.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To adjust all of the tone controls to themiddle position, push and hold the“AUDIO” knob for more than 2 seconds.“FLAT” will appear on the display.

Sound balance adjustment function—

This knob is also used to adjust thesound balance between the front and rear,and the right and left speakers.

For front/rear adjustment, push the“AUDIO” knob repeatedly until “FAD”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to adjust the front/rear balance.

For left/right adjustment, push the“AUDIO” knob repeatedly until “BAL”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to adjust the left/right balance.

To return to the middle position balances,push and hold the “AUDIO” knob for morethan 2 seconds.

Auto EQ (Automatic equalization)

Radio

This button is designed to select the pre-set equalization (EQ) settings for tone.The preset settings are designed for 6program types (Classical, Pop, Rock,Jazz, Talk, Country). Settings consist ofthe bass, midrange and treble controlpositions which can be stored into thecustom setting.

To use a preset EQ setting: Push the“AUTO EQ” button until you reach thesetting you want. Every time you pushthis button, the display toggles through thesix presets and custom setting in the fol-lowing order; 1: Classical, 2: Pop, 3:Rock, 4: Jazz, 5: Talk, 6: Country, 7: Cus-tom.

To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM):Push the “AUTO EQ” button until“CUSTOM” appears on the display. Thenyou can manually adjust the bass,midrange, treble using the “AUDIO” knob.(See “AUDIO”.) This will overwrite anyprevious custom setting that was savedwith a station preset.

When a tuner preset is saved, the currentEQ preset name is saved along with thetuner setting. Additionally, the current EQsetting is saved with the current mode(AM, FM1, FM2 or CD).

Compact disc auto changerPush “AUTO EQ” to select the desiredpreset equalization setting while playing aCD. The equalization will be automaticallyset whenever you play a CD.

CD/AUX (Compact Disc/Auxiliary)

Push “CD/AUX” to switch from radio tocompact disc auto changer operation. Adisc must already be loaded in the autochanger.

When the audio is set into compact discoperation, the display shows the tracknumber currently being played.

If the auto changer or another unitequipped with the player malfunctions,your audio system will display one of thesix following error messages.

Error messages


“CHECK CD”:




“PLAYER ERROR”: There may be a mo-tor problem in loading or unloading a discor communication problem in the changerunit.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


“NO CD”: The compact disc auto changeris empty. Insert a disc.

If the disc is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

H/M (Hours/minutes adjustment)

These buttons are used to adjust theclock time. For details, see “Clock” onpage 150 in Section 1−9.

INFO (Information)




LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc auto changerwhich is integrated with the radio. Thiscompact disc auto changer can store upto 6 discs.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the load function.

Loading one compact disc only—

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button. If you holdthe button too long, the mechanism willchange to the mode for loading multiplecompact discs. After pushing the button,wait for the load/eject status light to turngreen then, insert a compact disc. Afterthe disc is loaded, the shutter of the slotwill close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 8 seconds.

If you push this button when the changeris full, three beeps will sound.

Loading multiple compact discs—

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button until you hear two beeps.When the load/eject status light turnsgreen, insert a disc. Wait for the load/eject status light to turn green before in-serting the next disc.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 8 seconds.

If you push this button when the changeris full, three beeps will sound.



P T YPE (Program Types)

To turn on the PTY mode, push the“P T YPE” button while receiving an RDSstation. The current program type will ap-pear on the display.

You can select one of the following pro-grams by turning the tune (P T YPE) knobwhile the PTY mode is on.

" Any Type

" News


" Sports

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


" Talk

" Rock

" Cls Rck (Classic rock)


" Soft Rck

" Top 40

" Country

" Oldies

" Soft


" Jazz


" R & B

" Soft R & B

" Language




" Public

" College

" Weather

Interrupt function

If the radio in on the compact disc mode,the radio will switch to the FM band withthe previous interrupt volume. The pro-gram type and “Int” will appear. If theradio in on the FM mode, the volume willbe adjusted to the previous interrupt vol-ume. To cancel the interrupt function,press “P·TYPE” or the selected mode but-ton.

If the radio in on the PTY mode, programtypes, except Any Type, may be selectedas interrupts. To set a program type as aninterrupt, push and hold “P·TYPE” while aprogram type is displayed until you heara beep. The asterisk will appear when aninterrupt is set.

To turn off an interrupt while the radio inon the PTY mode, select the program typemarked with an asterisk. Push and hold“P·TYPE” until you hear a beep. The as-terisk will disappear.



Program types can be stored to the presetbuttons. For details, see “1 2 3 4 5 6(Preset or disc selection buttons)”.


If the radio is in the PTY mode, it will findand play the next station up or down thestation band within the same programtype. If no PTY station will be found,“NOT FOUND” will appear on the displayand the radio will return to the previousfrequency.



If the radio is in the PTY mode, it willtune in the next station within the sameprogram type.


RCL (Recall)

This button is designed to change the dis-play in each mode. You can also displaythe clock by pushing this button when theignition switch is off.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Radio

Push the “RCL” button to change the dis-play among frequency, program servicename, and program type while receivingRDS stations. To change what is normallyshown on the display, push this buttonuntil you see the display you want, thenpush and hold this button until the displayflashes and you hear a beep.


Push the “RCL” button to see how longthe current track has been playing. Tochange what is normally shown on thedisplay (track number or elapsed time),push this button until you see the displayyou want, then push and hold this buttonuntil the display flashes and you hear abeep.

RDM (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on all the com-pact discs in the changer in random order,or only listen to the tracks on a specificcompact disc in random order.

To randomly play the tracks on a disc:Push and hold the “RDM” button until“RANDOM ONE” appears on the displayand you hear a beep. The disc you arelistening to will play in random order. Toturn off the random feature, push this but-ton again.

To randomly play all the tracks in thechanger:Quickly push and release the “RDM” but-ton. “RANDOM ALL” will appear on thedisplay and the auto changer will performall the tracks on all the discs in thechanger in random order. If you hear abeep, the auto changer will perform all thetracks on all the discs in the changer. Toturn off the random feature, push this but-ton again.

RPT (Repeat)

There are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release the “ ” but-ton while the track is playing. “REPEATTRACK” will appear on the display. If youpush and hold the button, the auto chang-er will repeat the whole disc. When thetrack ends, it will automatically replay. Toturn off the repeat feature, push this but-ton again.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold the “ ” button until“REPEAT CD” appears on the display. Theauto changer will repeat all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. When thedisc ends, the auto changer will automati-cally go back to the top track of the discand replay. To turn off the repeat feature,push this button again.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


SCAN

Radio


To scan the preset stations: Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for more than 4 secondsuntil “PRESET SCAN” appears on the dis-play and you hear two beeps. The radiowill tune in the next preset station up theband, stay there for 5 seconds, and thenmove to the next preset station. To cancelscan and remain on current station, pushthis button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for about two seconds until“SC” appears on the display and you heara beep. The radio will find the next stationup the station band, stay there for 5 se-conds, and then scan again to the nextpreset. To cancel scan and remain on cur-rent station, push this button again. If youhear two beeps, the radio will scan thepreset stations.

You can also scan only to stations withthe types of programs you want to listento or traffic announcements. (See“P.TYPE”.)


There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in thechanger.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for about two seconds until“SCAN” appears on the display and youhear a beep. The auto changer will scanall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. If you hear two beeps, the auto chang-er will scan the first track of all the discsin the changer. To select a track, pusheither side of this button again.

Scanning the first track of all the discs inthe changer:Push and hold either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” button for more than 4 secondsuntil “DISC SCAN” appears on the displayand you hear two beeps. The auto chang-er will scan the first track of the nextdisc. To select a disc, push either side ofthis button again.

SEEK (Seeking)

Radio


To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease either side of the “SEEK/SCAN”button. If you hear a beep, the radio willscan the stations. (See “SCAN”.) Do thisagain to find the station after that.

You can also seek only to stations withthe types of programs you want listen toor traffic announcements. (See “P.TYPE”.)


By using this button, you can skip up ordown to a different track.

Push either side of the “SEEK/SCAN” but-ton repeatedly until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push the“ ” button one time.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


SONG LIST

This integrated six−disc compact disc autochanger has a feature called song list.This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections.

To save tracks into the song list feature,perform the following steps:

1. Turn the compact disc player on andload it with at least one disc. (See“LOAD”.)

2. Make sure the disc changer is not insong list mode. “S−LIST” should notappear in the display. If “S−LIST” ispresent, push the “SONG LIST” buttonto turn it off.

3. Select the desired disc by pushing thenumbered button and then use the rightside of the “SEEK/SCAN” button to lo-cate the track you want to save. Thetrack will begin to play.

4. To save the track, push and hold the“SONG LIST” button until you hear twobeeps.

5. Repeat step 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

If you try to save more than 20 selec-tions, “S−LIST FULL” will appear on thedisplay.

To play the song list, push the “SONGLIST” button. One beep will be heard and“S−LIST” will appear on the display. Therecorded tracks will begin to play in theorder that they were saved.

You may seek through the song list byusing the “SEEK/SCAN” button. Seekingpast the last saved track will return to thefirst saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, per-form the following steps:

1. Turn the disc player on.

2. Push the “SONG LIST” button to turnthe song list on. “S−LIST” will appearon the display.

3. Push either side of the “SEEK/SCAN”button to select the desired track to bedeleted.

4. Push and hold the “SONG LIST” buttonfor more than two seconds until youhear a beep. After two seconds ofpushing the button continuously, twobeeps will be heard to confirm that thetrack has been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the re-maining tracks are moved up the list.When another track is added to the songlist, the tracks will be added to the endof the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the disc player on.

2. Push the “SONG LIST” button to turnsong list on. “S−LIST” will appear onthe display.

3. Push and hold the button for more than4 seconds. A beep will be heard, fol-lowed by two beeps after two secondsand a final beep will be heard after 4seconds. “S−LIST EMPTY” will appearon the display indicating that the songlist has been deleted.

If a disc is ejected, and the song listcontains saved tracks from that disc,those tracks are automatically deletedfrom the song list. Any tracks saved tothe song list again are added to the bot-tom of the list.

To end the song list mode, push the“SONG LIST” button. One beep will beheard and “S−LIST” will be removed fromthe display.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


TRAF (Traffic)


By pushing “< >” button, “TRAF” appearson the display and the radio will startseeking any traffic program station.



If no traffic program station is found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the display for 5seconds and the display returns to theprevious mode. If the “TRAF” button ispushed when the compact disc player ison, the radio will start seeking traffic pro-gram stations.



TUNE (Tuning)


NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-erations:

! Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

! Do not put anything other than acassette tape or Compact Disc intothe slot.

! The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio system which you are listeningto. However, this does not indicatea malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Car audio system operatinghints

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere–especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly.

" A dirty tape head or tape path candecrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high−quality cassettes.

" Low−quality cassette tapes can causemany problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto−reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

" Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

" Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

" Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

" Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

" Use only compact discs labeled asshown above. CD−R (CD−Recordable),CD−RW (CD−Re−writable) and personalcomputer use CD−ROMs may not beplayable on your compact disc player.

" The player is intended for use with 12cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

" Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

" Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

" If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


" Your automatic changer or compactdisc player cannot play discs with aspecial shape, label or low−qualitycompact discs such as those shownhere. Do not use them as the changeror player could be damaged.

" Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

" Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

" Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti−static device.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning system

Controls 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air flow selector settings 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating tips 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel vents 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 8

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. “A/C” button (on some models)

2. Air flow selector

3. Fan speed selector

4. Temperature selector

5. Air intake selector

Controls

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperatu-re—to the right to warm, to the left tocool.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used forair flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Turning the air flow selector to thefloor/windshield position turns on thedefogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

Vehicles with “A/C” button—

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to thewindshield position turns on the defog-ging function with the purpose of clear-ing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.


Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,see the illustration after “A/C” button.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button (on some models)

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

! Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

! On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

! Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

! On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

! When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

Air flow selector settings

: On some models

Operating tips

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

! For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

! Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

! Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

! For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

Ventilation


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Defogging

The inside of the windshield



(red zone) to heat;COLD (blue zone) to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, the airintake selects FRESH automatically. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air intakeselector button once again.


Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

! On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

The outside of the windshield



(red zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defrosting function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, the airintake selects FRESH automatically. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air intakeselector button once again.


Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

! To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Open

Close

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The instrumentpanel vents may be opened or closed asshown.

You can change air flow direction by turn-ing the instrument panel vents.

The air conditioning filter is behind theglove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioning and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows begin to fog up easily inFRESH mode.

To keep the air conditioning efficiency, re-place the filter following the interval below;

! U.S.A.—Every 22500 miles∗

! Canada—Every 16000 km∗: If you drive your vehicle on dusty roadsmostly, replace the filter every 10000miles.

Instrument panel ventsChecking and replacing theair conditioning filter

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. Open the glove box. Remove thescrew with a Phillips−head screw-driver and slide off the damper asshown.

2. Push each side of the glove box todisconnect the claws.

3. Remove the filter cover as shown inthe illustration.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


4. Remove the filter from the filter out-let. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When installing the filter in the filteroutlet, keep the arrow pointing up.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentClock 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and portable ashtray 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets (12 VDC) 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet (115 VAC) 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary box 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holderss 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seatback tables 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage storage boxes 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie−down hooks and tire tie−down beltss 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage deck rails 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 9

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Type A

Type B

The digital clock indicates the timewhen the key is in the “ACC” or “ON”position. Even when the ignition switchis off, you can turn on the clock dis-play for a few seconds by pushing the“RCL” button.

Type A—To set the time, push and holdthe “HR” or “MIN” button until the “:”starts flashing. Then set the time by push-ing the “HR” (hour) and the “MIN” (minute)buttons. If the time is before 12 noon,“AM” appears on the display when thetime being set.

Type B—To set the time, push and holdthe “H” or “M” button until the “:” startsflashing. Then set the time by pushing the“H” (hour) and the “M” (minute) buttons.When the time is being set, “AM” or “PM”appears on the display.

RDS CLOCK UPDATE FUNCTION

You can update the clock with RDS(Radio Data System) data. Push and holdthe “HR” and “MIN” (type A) or “H” and“M” (type B) buttons at least 2 secondswhile receiving an RDS station. “TIMEUPDATED” will appear on the display witha beep and the clock will be updated. Ifsetting could not be completedsuccessfully, “NO UPDATED” will appearon the display.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.After it finishes heating up, it automati-cally pops out ready for use.

If the engine is not running, the key mustbe in the “ACC” position.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter orequivalent for replacement.

ClockCigarette lighter and portableashtray

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


PORTABLE ASHTRAY

The ashtray can be removed and usedoutside the vehicle. To use the ashtray,open the lid.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, push it backin completely.

To remove the ashtray, pull it out from thefront cup holder.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, always completely closethe ashtray after use.

Instrument panel

Rear console box

Power outlets (12 VDC)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The power outlets are designed forpower supply for car accessories.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the power outlets to be used.

NOTICE

! To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of12V/120W (instrument panel andrear console box outlets together).

! To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlets longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

! Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting a foreign object other thanthe appropriate plug that fits theoutlet, or allowing any liquid intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

This power outlet is designed for useas a power supply for electric ap-pliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.

NOTICE

! To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

Power outlet (115 VAC)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinga foreign object other than the ap-propriate plug that fits the outletmay cause electrical failure or shortcircuits.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances eventhough their power consumption is un-der 115 VAC/100W. These appliancesmay not operate properly.

! Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,compressor−driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

! Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

! Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer−controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

The direction is indicated on the insiderear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off withthe system on, the system will automati-cally turn back on when the ignition switchis turned on.

To turn on the compass, push and holdthe “ ” switch until the display turnson.To turn off the compass, push and holdthe “ ” switch until the display turnsoff.

The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading north.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

! The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

! The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

! The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

! The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

Compass

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

! The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe inside rear view mirror.)

! The battery has been disconnected.

Your vehicle is out of the set zone. Referto the “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” be-low to set the zone number.

The compass works to calibrate the direc-tion automatically while the vehicle is inmotion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is in the insiderear view mirror.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the inside rear view mirrorof the vehicle. Doing this may causemalfunction of the compass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,then push and hold the both personal lightswitches until the zone number appearson the display. Then push the right sideor left side personal light switch, referringto the following map to select the numberof the zone where the vehicle is.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system forseveral seconds returns it to the compassmode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Hawaii: 5Samoa: 5Guam: 8Saipan: 8

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Torectify this, stop the vehicle and push andhold the both personal light switches until“C” appears on the display.

If “C” appears on the display because ofa drastic change in the magnetic field,perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5mph) or less. If there is not enough spaceto drive in a circle, drive around theblock.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the abovemethod, calibration is completed when thedirection is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed becauseof the magnetized vehicle etc., take yourvehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the battery has been removed, re-placed or disconnected.

! Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

! During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

! When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

! Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

To open the glove box door, pull thelever.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

To use the box, pull on the handle.

CAUTION

! To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

! Do not use this auxiliary box as anashtray.

Glove box Auxiliary box (type A)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To use the box, push the lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary box closedwhile driving.

To use the box, push the knob.

To remove the auxiliary box, open the boxand pull it up.

CAUTION

! To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

! Do not use this auxiliary box as anashtray.

To access the rear console box, pull upthe lock release lever while raising therear console box lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

Auxiliary box (type B) Auxiliary box (type C) Rear console box (type A)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the con-sole box lid without touching the lockrelease lever.

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, pull upthe lock release lever while raising therear console box lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

Rear console box (type B)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Front

Rear

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink−cans securely.

Rear cup holder—To use the holder, pullit out.

CAUTION

! Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

! Rear cup holder—To reduce thechance of injury in case of an acci-dent or sudden stop while driving,keep the cup holder closed when itis not in use.

Front passenger’s seatback

Rear right side seatback

Cup holders Seatback tables

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


You can use the front passenger’s seat-back and rear right side seatback as atemporary table only when the vehicleis stopped.

To use the seatback table, fold the seat-back down. For detailed information, see“—Fold−down front passenger’s seat” onpage 30 or “Fold−down rear seat” on page31 in Section 1−3.

CAUTION




NOTICE


Front

Rear

To open the luggage storage box, turnthe knobs to the “UNLOCK” positionand open the lid. To close the luggagestorage box, lower the lid and turn theknobs to the “LOCK” position.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the luggage storageboxes closed and locked while driv-ing.

Luggage storage boxes

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Rear luggage storage box—

To keep the lid open, attach the hook asshown above.

NOTICE

Do not close the back door with at-taching the hook, or the hook may bedamaged.

Keep the hook stored in its original posi-tion as shown when it is not in use.

To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as shown above.

The tire tie−down belts are designed tosecure the flat tire. You can also use thebelts to secure your luggage. (To securethe flat tire, see “—Stowing flat tire” onpage 209 in Section 4.)

See “Luggage stowage precautions” onpage 178 in Section 2 for precautions inloading luggage.

Tie−down hooks and tiretie−down belts

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To tighten

To loosen

To hook

To unhook

To use the tire tie−down belts, do asshown in the illustration.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−down hooks retracted and the tiretie−down belts stored in the luggagestorage box when not in use.

To use the luggage deck rails, youmust install genuine Toyota accessoriesor their equivalent for the deck rails.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions when installing a genuineToyota accessory or equivalent.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” onpage 178 in Section 2 for precautions inloading luggage.

CAUTION

When you secure cargo with the lug-gage deck rails, be sure follow theinstructions below in order to avoidthe cargo coming loose:

! Do not place cargo exceeding 31 kg(70 lb.) on the luggage deck rails.

! To prevent luggage or cargo fromsliding forward during braking,make sure the deck rail accessoriessuch as tie−down hooks are secure-ly attached on the deck rails.

! When the rear seats are foldeddown, they are not locked intoplace and may move. After drivingon rough roads or at high speeds,cargo attached to the seat backrails may have moved out of place.Check the cargo and resecure ifnecessary.

Luggage deck rails

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To use the luggage cover:

1. Attach the left side hooks of the lug-gage cover to the left side uppertie−down hooks.

2. Attach the right side hooks of theluggage cover to the right side up-per tie−down hooks.

3. Pull the belt ends of the right sidehooks to secure the luggage cover.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggagecover. Such items may be thrownabout and possibly injure people inthe vehicle during sudden braking oran accident.

To remove the luggage cover, loosenthe right side belts of the hooks asshown above. Then remove the hooksfrom tie−down hooks.

When you remove the luggage cover, foldup and store it in the luggage storagebox.

Luggage cover

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have twoholes, then it is designed for use with twolocking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock-ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTABreak−in period 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel pump shut off system 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation in foreign countries 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three−way catalytic converters 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine exhaust cautions 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Facts about engine oil consumption 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Iridium−tipped spark plugs 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake system 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake pad wear limit indicators 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage stowage precautions 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft prevention labels 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suspension and chassis 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types of tires 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

! Do not drive over 88 km/h (55 mph).

! Run the engine at moderate speed be-tween 2000 and 4000 rpm.

! Avoid full−throttle starts.

! Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

! Do not drive slowly with the manualtransmission in a high gear.

! Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

! Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

1ZZ−FE engine—Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc-tane Number 91) or higher.

2ZZ−GE engine—Select premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-tane Number 96) or higher for optimumengine performance.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, now and then, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

Break−in period Fuel

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of three categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 3 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


NOTICE

! Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

! If driveability problems occur (poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

! Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

Two−wheel drive models50 L (13.2 gal., 11.0 Imp. gal.)

Four−wheel drive models45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that liquid has leaked onto theground, it is the fuel system hasbeen damaged and it is in need ofrepair. In this case, do not restart theengine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Two−wheel drive models with 1ZZ−FE en-gine

Four−wheel drive models with 1ZZ−FE en-gine

2ZZ−GE engine

The three−way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

! Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

! Do not drive, idle or park your ve-hicle over anything that might burneasily such as grass, leaves, paperor rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

! Use only unleaded gasoline.

! Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

! Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

Three−way catalytic converters

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Avoid racing the engine.

! Do not push−start or pull−start yourvehicle.

! Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

! Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel systems could cause an ex-tremely high three−way catalyticconverter temperature.

! If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

! To ensure that the three−way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

CAUTION

! Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

! Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

! Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

! Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

! To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

! Keep the back door and glass hatchclosed while driving. An open orunsealed back door and glasshatch, may cause exhaust gases tobe drawn into the vehicle.

If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, drive with the windowsopen and the back door closed.Have the cause immediately locatedand corrected.

Engine exhaust cautions

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

! Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

! Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 242 in Section 7−2.

Facts about engine oilconsumption

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Your engine is fitted with iridium−tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugsand do not adjust gaps for your en-gine performance and smooth drive-ability.

The tandem master cylinder brake systemis a hydraulic system with two separatesub−systems. If either sub−system shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will be longer. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum topower−assist the brakes. If the engineshould quit while you are driving, you canbring the vehicle to a stop with normalpedal pressure. There is enough reservedvacuum for one or two stops—but nomore!

CAUTION

! Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your reserved vacu-um.

! Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willbe longer.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(with “ABS” warning light)

The anti−lock brake system is designedto help prevent lock−up of the wheelsduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces. This assists inproviding directional stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Iridium−tipped spark plugs Brake system

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti−lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking performan-ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on the manholecover, the steel plate under the construc-tion, joints in the bridge, etc. on a rainyday tends to activate the anti−lock brakesystem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle is started. This means that theanti−lock brake system is in the self−check mode, and does not indicate a mal-function.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

! You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

! At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lockbrake system: Although the anti−lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on.

If tires grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at the moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

! Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Driving with tire chains installed.

! Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

! Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti−lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

Type A

Type B

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if the system malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

! The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

! The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM (with 2ZZ−GE engine)

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding−down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding−down.

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

Brake pad wear limitindicators

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


When stowing luggage or cargo in thevehicle, observe the following:

! Put luggage or cargo in the luggagecompartment when at all possible. Besure all items are secured in place.

! Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as far for-ward as possible helps maintain bal-ance.

! For better fuel economy, do not carryunneeded weight.

CAUTION

! When the rear seatbacks are in theupright position—To prevent luggage or packagesfrom sliding forward during braking,do not stack anything in the lug-gage compartment higher than theseatbacks. Keep luggage or pack-ages low, as close to the floor aspossible.

When the rear seatbacks are foldeddown—To prevent luggage or packagesfrom sliding forward during braking,do not stack anything in the en-larged luggage compartment. Keepluggage or packages low, as closeto the floor as possible.

! Never allow anyone to ride in theluggage compartment. It is not de-signed for passengers. They shouldride in their seats with their seatbelts properly fastened. Otherwise,they are much more likely sufferserious bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a collision.

! Do not place anything on the lug-gage cover. Such items may bethrown about and possibly injurepeople in the vehicle during suddenbraking or an accident. Secure allitems in a safe place.

! Do not drive with objects left ontop of the instrument panel. Theymay interfere with the driver’s fieldof view. Or they may move duringsharp vehicle acceleration or turn-ing, and impair the driver’s controlof the vehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occupants.

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyond thevehicle capacity weight specified onpage 268 in Section 8.

Luggage stowage precautions

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from the out-side.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Regulation Label.

1ZZ−FE engine

2ZZ−GE engine

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber —Engine number

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 56mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Theft prevention labels(except for Canada) Suspension and chassis

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Determine what kind of tires your ve-hicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are high−speed capabilitytires best suited to highway driving underdry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the sametraction performance as snow tires, sum-mer tires are inadequate for driving onsnow−covered or icy roads. For driving onsnow−covered or icy roads, we recom-mend using snow tires. If installing snowtires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to providebetter traction in snow and to be adequatefor driving in most winter conditions, aswell as for use all year round.

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performance comparedwith snow tires in heavy or loose snow.Also, all season tires fall short in accel-eration and handling performancecompared with summer tires in highwaydriving.

CAUTION

! Do not mix summer and all seasontires on your vehicle as this cancause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of con-trol.

! Do not use tire other than themanufacturer’s designated tires, andnever mix tires or wheels of thesizes different from the originals.

Types of tires

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


STARTING AND DRIVINGBefore starting the engine 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four−wheel driving tips 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 194. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion height, head restraintheight and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all the side doors and back door.Close the glass hatch.

5. Fasten seat belts.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Manual transmission: Press the clutchpedal to the floor and shift the trans-mission into neutral. Hold the clutchpedal to the floor until the engine isstarted. A starter safety device will pre-vent the starter from operating if theclutch pedal is not fully depressed.

Automatic transmission: Put the se-lector lever in “P”. If you need to re-start the engine while the vehicle ismoving, put the selector lever in “N”.A starter safety device will prevent thestarter from operating if the selectorlever is in any drive position.

4. Automatic transmission only: De-press the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair−fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

1. With your foot off the accelerator ped-al, crank the engine by turning the keyto “START”. Release it when the en-gine starts.

2. After the engine runs for about 10 se-conds, you are ready to drive.

If the weather is below freezing, let theengine warm up for a few minutes beforedriving.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page198 in Section 4.

Before starting the engineHow to start the engine—(a) Before cranking (b) Starting the engine

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


NOTICE

! Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

! Do not race a cold engine.

! If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

! Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

! Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage result-ing in tire bursts.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

! When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P” (automatic) or in first orreverse (manual). If necessary, blockthe wheels.

! Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

! Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

! Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

! Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

! To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

Tips for driving in variousconditions

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking, could causethe vehicle to spin or skid.

! Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

! Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

! If you need greater traction while driv-ing on sand, mud or snow coveredroadways, use tire chains on the frontwheels.

! Always check your brakes for effective-ness immediately after driving acrosssand, mud, or water.

! If operating in adverse conditionsfrequently, vehicle maintenance shouldbe increased. (See the separate“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Observe the following tire instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accident may oc-cur resulting in death or serious inju-ries.

! Keep your tire pressure at the prop-er level. (See “—Checking tire pres-sure” on page 247 in Section 7−2.)

! Do not use tires (including snowtires) of different brands, sizes,construction or tread patterns. (See“—Checking and replacing tires” onpage 248 and “—Installing snowtires and chains” on page 250 inSection 7−2.)

! Do not use tires with different treadwear. To equalize the tire wear, ro-tate tires at the appropriate interval.(See “—Rotating tires” on page 249in Section 7−2.)

! Use the manufacturer’s recom-mended wheels. Do not use wheelsof different sizes and types. (See“—Replacing wheels” on page 252in Section 7−2.)

NOTICE

Do not attempt to go off−road in yourToyota. It is not designed for off−roaduse.

Four−wheel driving tips (4WD models)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Make sure you have a proper freezeprotection of engine coolant.

Your coolant must contain ethylene−glycoltype coolant for a proper corrosionprotection of aluminum components. Use“TOYOTA Long Life Coolant” or equivalent.

See page 244 in Section 7−2 for detailsabout coolant type selection.

NOTICE

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze orplain water alone.

When it is extremely cold, we recommendto use 60% solution for your Toyota, toprovide protection down to about −50"C(−58"F). Do not use more than 70% solu-tion for better coolant performance.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. Section 7−3 tells you how to visuallyinspect the battery. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 242 in Section 7−2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer–he will be pleased tohelp.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing. To opena frozen lock, try heating the key beforeinserting it.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” (automatic) or into first or reverse(manual) and block the rear wheels. Donot use the parking brake, or snow orwater accumulated in and around theparking brake mechanism may freeze,making it hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use window scraper or deicerwhen the plastic resin moon roof isheavily coated with frost or ice. Theplastic resin moon roof is easily dam-aged.

Winter driving tips

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Your vehicle can be dinghy towed (withfour wheels on the ground) from thefront behind a motorhome.

CAUTION

Dinghy towing requires special equip-ment and accessories. Please refer toyour service outlet of the motorhomemanufacture for the recommendedequipment.

NOTICE

Dinghy towing does not eliminate thepossibility of damage to your vehicle.

DINGHY TOWING TIPS

Before dinghy towing, be sure to ob-serve the following in order to reducethe damage to your vehicle.

1. Put the shift lever in neutral.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”position. Make sure the audio is turnedoff and any item is not plugged intothe power outlet.

NOTICE

To avoid the locking of the steeringwheel, turn the ignition switch to the“ACC” position.

3. Release the parking brake.

After dinghy towing, let the engine idle formore than 3 minutes before driving thevehicle.

Dinghy towing(with automatic transmission)

Dinghy towing(with manual transmission)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle from therear. This may cause serious damageto your vehicle.

Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger−carrying vehicle. Towing atrailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For yoursafety and the safety of others, you mustnot overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyotawarranties do not apply to damage ormalfunction caused by towing a trailer forcommercial purposes. Ask your localToyota dealer for further details beforetowing.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

! The total trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo load) mustnot exceed 680 kg (1500 lb.). Ex-ceeding this weight is dangerous.

Trailer towing

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

! The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

! The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

Tongue load

Tongue load! 100 = 9 to 11%

! The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumof 68 kg (150 lb.). Never load thetrailer with more weight in the backthan in the front. About 60% of thetrailer load should be in the fronthalf of the trailer and the remaining40% in the rear.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


HITCHES

! Use only a weight carrying hitchdesigned for the total trailer weight.Toyota does not recommend using aweight distribution (load equalizing)hitch.

! The hitch must be bolted securely tothe vehicle frame and installed accord-ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

! The hitch ball should have a light coatof grease.

! Toyota recommends that the trailerhitch be removed when not towing toprevent injury and/or damage by thehitch in event of a rear end collision.After removing the hitch, the installa-tion area should be sealed to prevententry of exhaust fumes and mud.

NOTICE

Do not use an axle−mounting hitch asit may cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels and/or tires.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

! Toyota recommends trailers with brakesthat conform to any applicable federaland state/provincial regulations.

! A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain should crossunder the trailer tongue to prevent thetongue from dropping to the ground incase it becomes damaged or sepa-rated. For correct safety chain proce-dures, follow the hitch or trailermanufacturer’s recommendations.

CAUTION

! If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired.

! Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.

! Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES

! Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 247 in Sec-tion 7−2 for instructions.

! The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

! Trailer lights must comply with federal,state/provincial and local regulations.See your local recreational vehicledealer or rental agency for the correcttype of wiring and relays for your trail-er. Check for correct operation of theturn signals and stop lights each timeyou hitch up. Direct splicing may dam-age your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

! Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

! If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For this informa-tion, please refer to the scheduledmaintenance information in the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

! Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

! Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose−up or nose−downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

! Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

! Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

! Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

! Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

! Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, prevent excessive clutchslippage by keeping engine rpm lowand not racing the engine. Always startout in first gear.

! Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

! Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer). Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

! Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

! Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

! In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency, do not use fifth gear (manualtransmission) or overdrive (automatictransmission).

! Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30"C [85"F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 201 inSection 4.

! Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P” (automatic)or in first or reverse (manual). Avoidparking on a slope with a trailer, butif it cannot be avoided, do so onlyafter performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into first or reverse (manual) or“P” (automatic) and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position(automatic) or the clutch pedal de-pressed (manual), start the engine.(With an automatic transmission, besure to keep the brake pedal de-pressed.)

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake (also footbrake on automatic transmission ve-hicles) and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

! Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

! Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

! Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page247 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

! Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

! Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

! Keep the automatic transmissionoverdrive turned on when enginebraking is not required. Driving withthe overdrive off will reduce the fueleconomy. (For details, see “Automatictransmission” on page 95 in Section1−6.)

! Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

! Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

! Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

! Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop−and−go drivingwastes fuel.

! Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

! Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

! Do not rest your foot on the clutchor brake pedal. This causes prematurewear, overheating and poor fuel econo-my.

! Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

! Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

! Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease,brakes not adjusted, etc. alllower engine performance and contrib-ute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”).

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIf your vehicle will not start 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your engine stalls while driving 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheats 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 216. . . . . . . .

If you lose your keys 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 217. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct startingprocedure given in “How to start theengine” on page 184 in Section 3 and thatyou have sufficient fuel.

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page199 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull−or push−start the vehicle.It may damage the vehicle or causea collision when the engine starts.Also the three−way catalytic convertermay overheat and become a fire haz-ard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK” and try starting the engineagain.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” on page 198 for further instruc-tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the key to “START”with the accelerator pedal held down.Keep the key and accelerator pedal thesepositions for 15 seconds and releasethem. Then try starting the engine withyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-conds of cranking, release the key, waita few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

! Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

! If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water im-mediately. Then get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, continueto apply water with a sponge orcloth while en route to the medicaloffice.

! The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

! Warning: Battery posts, terminalsand related accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

(c) Jump starting

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Dischargedbattery

Boosterbattery

Positive terminal(“+” mark)

Jumpercable Positive terminal

(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

Jumper cableBoosterbattery Negative terminal

(“−” mark)

Dischargedbattery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) cable to the negative (−) termi-nal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:

Connecting point

Do not connect it to or near any partthat moves when the engine iscranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


5. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the engineagain.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 198 in thissection.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”(automatic) or neutral (manual) and ap-ply the parking brake. Turn off the airconditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning and make sure the electriccooling fan is operating. If it is not,turn the ignition off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

If your engine stalls whiledriving If your vehicle overheats

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealerfor assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the en-gine is running. Fill it about half full.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually whiledriving in a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe place wellaway from the traffic. Avoid stoppingon the center divider of a highway.Park on a level spot with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and putthe transmission in “P” (automatic) orreverse (manual).

4. Have everyone get out of the vehicleon the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions thor-oughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

! Follow jacking instructions.

! Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Otherwise, personal injury mayoccur.

! Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

If you have a flat tire—

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”(automatic) or reverse (manual).Block the wheel diagonally oppositeto the one being changed if neces-sary.

! Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

! Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone.

! Use the jack only for lifting yourvehicle during wheel changing.

! Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

! When raising the vehicle, do notput an object on or under the jack.

! Raise the vehicle only high enoughto remove and change the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a de-flated tire. Driving even a short dis-tance can damage a tire and wheelbeyond repair.

Compact spare tire

The compact spare tire is designed fortemporary emergency use only.

The compact spare tire is identified by thedistinctive wording “TEMPORARY USEONLY” molded into the side wall of thetire.

The standard tire should be repaired andreplaced as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire saves space inyour luggage compartment, and its lighterweight helps to improve fuel economy andpermits easier installation in case of a flattire.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The compact spare tire can be used manytimes, if necessary. It has tread life of upto 4800 km (3000 miles) depending onroad conditions and your driving habits.When tread wear indicators appear on thetire, replace the tire.

See also the tire section on page 248 inSection 7−2 for details on the tread wearindicators and other service information.

CAUTION

! The compact spare tire was de-signed especially for your Toyota.Do not use it on any other vehicle.

! Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)when driving with the compactspare tire.

! Avoid sudden acceleration, suddendeceleration and sharp turns withthe compact spare tire.

NOTICE

Your ground clearance is reducedwhen the compact spare tire isinstalled so avoid driving over ob-stacles and drive slowly on rough,unpaved roads and speed bumps.Also, do not attempt to go through anautomatic car wash as the vehiclemay get caught, resulting in damage.

1. Open the rear luggage storage boxand get the required tools and sparetire.

1. Jack handle2. Wheel nut wrench3. Jack4. Spare tire

To open the rear luggage storage box, see“Luggage storage boxes” on page 161 inSection 1−9.

To prepare yourself for an emergency, youshould familiarize yourself with the use ofthe jack, each of the tools and their stor-age locations.

—Required tools and sparetire

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


To remove the jack, unhook the tighteningstrap.

To store the jack, make sure it is securelyheld by the tightening strap.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Loosen the nut and remove it.

2. Remove the luggage storage box.

3. Loosen the bolt and remove it.

When storing the spare tire, put it in placewith the inner side of the wheel facing up.Then secure the tire by repeating theabove removal steps in reverse order toprevent it from flying forward during acollision or sudden braking.

The compact tire storage area is designedonly for a compact spare tire. Standardsize tires cannot be stored in this storagearea.

2. Block the wheel diagonally oppositethe flat tire to keep the vehicle fromrolling when it is jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheelblock from the front for the front wheelsor from the rear for the rear wheels.

—Blocking the wheel

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrench asshown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the ornament byhand. Take due care in handling theornament to avoid unexpected person-al injury.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before rais-ing the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise toloosen. To get maximum leverage, fit thewrench to the nut so that the handle ison the right side, as shown above. Grabthe wrench near the end of the handleand pull up on the handle. Be careful thatthe wrench does not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrewthem about one−half turn.

5. Position the jack at the correct jackpoint as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on alevel and solid place.

—Removing wheel ornament(steel wheels) —Loosening wheel nuts —Positioning the jack

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Jack point guide

With side mud guards—The jack pointguides are located under the side mudguards. They indicate the jack point posi-tions.

6. After making sure that no one is inthe vehicle, raise it high enough sothat the spare tire can be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the spare tirethan when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handleinto the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn itclockwise. As the jack touches the vehicleand begins to lift, double−check that it isproperly positioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when thevehicle is supported by the jackalone.

—Raising your vehicle

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


7. Remove the wheel nuts and changetires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.

Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with the bolts.Then lift up the wheel and get at least thetop bolt started through its hole. Wigglethe tire and press it back over the otherbolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove any cor-rosion on the mounting surfaces with awire brush or such. Installation of wheelswithout good metal−to−metal contact at themounting surface can cause wheel nuts toloosen and eventually cause a wheel tocome off while driving. Therefore after thefirst 1600 km (1000 miles), check to seethat the wheel nuts are tight.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fingertight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end in-ward) and tighten them as much as youcan by hand. Press back on the tire backand see if you can tighten them more.

—Changing wheels —Reinstalling wheel nuts

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


9. Lower the vehicle completely andtighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclockwise tolower the vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and turnit clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do notuse other tools or any additional leverageother than your hands, such as a hammer,pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrenchis securely engaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in theorder shown. Repeat the process until allthe nuts are tight.

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle, make sureall portions of your body and all oth-er persons around will not be injuredas the vehicle is lowered to theground.

10. Restow all the tools and jack secure-ly in the luggage storage box. Thensecure the flat tire in the luggagecompartment with the tire tie−downbelts and tie−down hooks as follows.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are securelyin place in their storage location toreduce the possibility of personal in-jury during a collision or suddenbraking.

—Lowering your vehicle —Stowing flat tire

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. Aluminum wheels—Before stowing theflat tire, remove the center wheel orna-ment by pushing from the reverse side.

Be careful not to lose the wheel ornament.

Buckle

2. Put the flat tire on the rear luggagestorage box lid with the outer side ofthe wheel facing up. Hook the beltclips closest to the buckle to the rearupper tie−down hooks.

3. Pass the belts through the center holeof the wheel as shown above.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


4. Attach the other clips of the belts tothe lower rear tie−down hooks.

5. Position the tire edge against the rearcenter end of the rear luggage storagebox lid. Then pull the ends of the beltsto secure the tire securely.

After stowing the flat tire, check that thetire and belts are secured.

To loosen the tire tie−down belts, see“Tie−down hooks and tire tie−down belts”on page 162 in Section 1−9.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


11. Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specificationdesignated on page 272 in Section 8. Ifthe pressure is lower, drive slowly to thenearest service station and fill to the cor-rect pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflationvalve cap as dirt and moisture could getinto the valve core and possibly cause airleakage. If the cap is missing, have a newone put on as soon as possible.

As soon after changing wheels as pos-sible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torquespecified on page 272 in Section 8 witha torque wrench. Have a technician repairthe flat tire.

Steel wheels

Aluminum wheels

After repairing the flat tire, change itwith compact spare tire and reinstallthe wheel ornament as follows.

Steel wheels—

1. Put the wheel ornament into position.

Align the cutout of the wheel ornamentwith the valve stem as shown.

2. Tap it firmly with the side or heel ofyour hand to snap it into place.

Aluminum wheels—

Push the wheel ornament into the centerhole.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the orna-ment to avoid unexpected personalinjury.

—After changing wheels

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

(b) Using flat bed truck

—From rear

—From front

Two−wheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—


—From rear

—From front

Four−wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 215 in this section.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

If your vehicle needs to betowed—

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


NOTICE

Four−wheel drive models—When tow-ing, be sure to tow the vehicle withall four wheels lifted. Otherwise, thedrive system could be damaged andthe vehicle could fly off the towtruck.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

Two−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From rear—

! Manual transmission:

We recommend using a towing dollyunder the front wheels. If you do notuse a towing dolly, place the ignitionkey in the “ACC” position and put thetransmission in neutral.

NOTICE

Do not tow with the key removed orin the “LOCK” position when towingfrom the rear without a towing dolly.The steering lock mechanism is notstrong enough to hold the frontwheels straight.

! Automatic transmission:

Use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatictransmission from the rear with thefront wheels on the ground, as thismay cause serious damage to thetransmission.


Four−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Use a towing dolly under the wheels notlifted by the truck.


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


(c) Towing with slingtype truck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed by a cable or chain se-cured to the emergency towing eyeletunder the front of the vehicle. Use ex-treme caution when towing vehicle.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing eyelet and towing cable orchain. The eyelet and towing cable orchain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

—Emergency towing

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the transmission in neutral (manu-al) or “N” (automatic). The key must bein “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine run-ning).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flat−bladedscrewdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert your finger into the hole topush down the shift lock overridebutton. You can shift out of “P”position only while pushing the but-ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 8 in Section 1−2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

You can purchase a new wireless re-mote control transmitter at your Toyotadealer.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new transmitter. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If you lose your keysIf you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CAREProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washing and waxing your Toyota 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the interior 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Toyota, through its diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, has done its part tohelp prevent corrosion and has providedyou with the finest quality vehicleconstruction. Now, it is up to you. Propercare of your Toyota can help ensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

! The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

! Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

! Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

! High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

! Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

! High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which are prevented fromquick−drying due to lack of proper ven-tilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

! If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

! High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing them.The lower edge of doors, rocker panelsand frame members have drain holeswhich should not be allowed to clogwith dirt as trapped water in theseareas can cause corrosion.

! Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 221 for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it in coveredwith water or snow, your garage may beso damp it will cause corrosion. Even ifyour garage is heated, a wet vehicle cancorrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

! When driving in a coastal area

! When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

! When having coal tar, tree sap, birddroppings and carcass of an insect

! When driving in the areas where thereis a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dustand chemical substance

! When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or in thewheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splashes an ornament, be sure towash it off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damagedplastic wheel ornament. It may fly offthe wheel and cause accidents whilethe vehicle is moving.

Washing and waxing yourToyota

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol-vents), which may be toxic or causedamage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some type ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed before driv-ing your Toyota through an automaticcar wash.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Once a month or if the vehicle surfacedoes not repel water well, apply wax.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers ifyour vehicle is re−painted and placedin a high heat paint waxing booth.High temperatures could damage thebumpers.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

! Vehicles with side airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, resulting in seriousinjury.

! Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

! Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

! Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Cleaning the interior

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Air conditioning control panel, car au-dio, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

! Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

! If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

! If you use a liquid car freshener, donot apply the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

! If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

! Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

! Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

! Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

! Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

! Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREMaintenance requirements 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 232. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, and trouble−free, safe, and eco-nomical drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. And if anyproblems should arise with your vehiclewhile under warranty, your Toyota dealerwill promptly take care of it. Again, besure to keep a copy of the repair orderfor any service performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 233 inSection 7.

Maintenance requirements

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only where ade-quate ventilation can be obtained ifyou run the engine.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Tire pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge everytwo weeks, or at least once a month. Seepage 247 in Section 7−2 for additionalinformation.

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts, damageor excessive wear. See page 248 in Sec-tion 7−2 for additional information. Whenchecking the tires, make sure no nuts aremissing, and check the nuts for loose-ness. Tighten them if necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For scheduledmaintenance information, please refer tothe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See page249 in Section 7−2 for additionalinformation.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors and back door includ-ing glass hatch operate smoothly and alllatches lock securely. Make sure the en-gine hood secondary latch secures thehood from opening when the primary latchis released.

General maintenance

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers

Check that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.Be alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraints move up and downsmoothly and that the locks hold securelyin any latched position. For folding−downrear seatbacks, check that the latcheslock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Clutch pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

At a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the lever has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nism

Check the lock release button of the se-lector lever for proper and smooth opera-tion. On a safe incline, check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in “P” position and all brakes re-leased.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 257 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−through reservoir when the engine is cold.See page 244 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 245 inSection 7−2 for additional information.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica-tor color. See page 254 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 245 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 242 in Section7−2 for additional information.

Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 246 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 172 in Section 2.)

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

! Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

! Appreciable loss of power

! Strange engine noises

! A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

! Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

! Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

! Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

! Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

! Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal al-most touches floor; vehicle pulls to oneside when braking

! Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil level dipstick

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Fuse block

7. Battery

8. Radiator

9. Electric cooling fan

10. Condenser

11. Windshield and rear window washerfluid tank

Engine compartment overview!1ZZ−FE engine

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil level dipstick

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Fuse block

7. Battery

8. Radiator

9. Electric cooling fan

10. Condenser

11. Windshield and rear window washerfluid tank

!2ZZ−GE engine

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Sparefuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 238 in this section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

Fuse locationsDo−it−yourself serviceprecautions

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

" When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

" Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold, power steeringfluid reservoir and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

" If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

" Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

" Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

" Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfans or radiator grille. With theignition on, the electric cooling fanswill automatically start to run if theengine coolant temperature is highand/or the air conditioning is on.

" Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

" Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

" Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

" Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

" Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

" Warning: Battery posts, terminalsand related accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE

! Remember that battery and ignitioncable carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

! Add only demineralized or distilledwater to fill the radiator. And if youspill some of the coolant, be sureto wash it off with water to preventit from damaging the parts or paint.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


! Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

! Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

! Do not reuse iridium−tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

! Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid, or the transmissioncould be damaged.

! Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

! Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

! When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed on performing do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

" Engine oil API grade SL“Energy−Conserving” or ILSACmultigrade having viscosity proper foryour climate

Tools:

" Rag or paper towel

" Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL


" “TOYOTA Long Life Coolant” or equiva-lentSee page 244 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about coolant type selection.

" Demineralized or distilled water

Tools:

" Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


" SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:


" Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID


" Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON#IIor III

Tools:


" Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

" Warm water

" Baking soda

" Grease

" Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

" Fuse with same amperage rating asoriginal

Parts and tools

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

" Water

" Washer fluid containing antifreeze(for winter use)

Tools:

" Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

" Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in“Replacing light bulbs” on page 257 inSection 7−3.)

Tools:

" Screwdriver

Front

Rear (two−wheel drive models)

Rear (four−wheel drive models)

When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

" Follow jacking instructions.

" Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

Positioning the jack

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


" Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

" Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”(automatic) or reverse (manual).Block the wheels on the oppositeside of the jack up point if neces-sary.

" Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

" Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone; use vehicle support stands.

" Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

" When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information

Precautions for tires of four wheel drive models 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire pressure 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Low level

Too fullO.K.Add oil

Full level

1ZZ−FEengine

2ZZ−GEengine

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a true reading, the vehicleshould be on a level spot. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop the engine oilon the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed tofill between the low level and the full levelon the dipstick is indicated below for ref-erence.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.):1ZZ−FE engine 1.3 (1.4, 1.1)2ZZ−GE engine 1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

! Be careful not to spill the engineoil on the vehicle components.

! Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

! Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


ENGINE OIL SELECTION

Use API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil.

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy, and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, aSAE 10W−30 oil may be used. However,it should be replaced with SAE 5W−30at the next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks areadded to some oil containers to helpyou select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oilquality by API (American Petroleum Insti-tute) designations such as SL. The centerportion of the label shows the SAE viscos-ity grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−Conserving” shown in the lower portion,indicates that the oil has fuel−saving ca-pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is displayed on the front ofthe container.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on thereservoir. If the level is low, add ethyl-ene−glycol type coolant for a propercorrosion protection of aluminum com-ponents.

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “LOW” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”line.

Always use ethylene−glycol type coolantfor a proper corrosion protection of alumi-num components. See information in thenext column.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system. Your coolantmust contain ethylene−glycol type coolantfor a proper corrosion protection of yourengine that contains aluminum compo-nents. Use “TOYOTA Long Life Coolant”or equivalent.

In addition to preventing freezing and sub-sequent damage to the engine, this typeof coolant will also prevent corrosion. Fur-ther supplemental inhibitors or additivesare neither needed nor recommended.

Read the coolant container for informationon freeze protection. Follow the manufac-turer’s directions for how much to mixwith plain water (preferably demineralizedwater or distilled water). The total capacityof the cooling system is given on page269 in Section 8.

We recommend to use 50% solution foryour Toyota, to provide protection down toabout −35!C (−31!F). When it is extreme-ly cold, to provide protection down toabout −50!C (−58!F), 60% solution is rec-ommended. Do not use more than 70%solution for better coolant performance.

NOTICE


Checking the engine coolantlevel

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent yourself from burning, becareful not to touch the radiator orcondenser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear. Sobe sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap byhand. Fill the brake fluid to the dottedline. This brings the fluid to the correctlevel when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoirbecause brake fluid can harm youreyes and damage painted surfaces. Iffluid gets in your eyes, flush youreyes with clean water immediately. Ifyou still feel uncomfortable with youreyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wash it off with water to preventit from damaging the parts or paint.

Checking the radiator andcondenser Checking brake fluid

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If hotO.K.

Close

Open

If coldO.K.

If hotadd

If coldadd

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON"II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60!C—80!C or 140!F—175!F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10!C—30!C or 50!F—85!F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoirtank and look at the fluid level. If the fluidis cold, the level should be in the “COLD”range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid levelshould be in the “HOT” range. If the levelis at the low side of either range, addautomatic transmission fluid DEXRON"II orIII to bring the level within the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

# Keep your tire pressure at the prop-er level. (See “—Checking tire pres-sure” on page 247 in this section.)

# Do not use tires (including snowtires) of different brands, sizes,construction or tread patterns. (See“—Checking and replacing tires” onpage 248 and “—Installing snowtires and chains” on page 250 inthis section.)

# Do not use tires with different treadwear. To equalize the tire wear, ro-tate tires at the appropriate interval.(See “—Rotating tires” on page 249in this section.)

# Use the manufacturer’s recom-mended wheels. Do not use wheelsof different sizes and types. (See“—Replacing wheels” on page 252in this section.)

Checking power steering fluid

Tire information——Precautions for tires offour−wheel drive models

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Keep your tire pressures at the properlevel.

The recommended cold tire pressures, tiresize and the vehicle capacity weight aregiven on page 268 in Section 8. They arealso on the tire pressure label as shown.

You should check the tire pressures everytwo weeks, or at least once a month. Anddo not forget the spare!

Incorrect tire pressure can reduce tirelife and make your vehicle less safe todrive.

Low tire pressure results in excessivewear, poor handling, reduced fuel econo-my, and the possibility of blowouts fromoverheated tires. Also, low tire pressurecan cause poor sealing of the tire bead.If the tire pressure is excessively low,there is the possibility of wheel deforma-tion and/or tire separation.

High tire pressure produces a harsh ride,handling problems, excessive wear at thecenter of the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of tire damage from road haz-ards.

If a tire frequently needs refilling, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.

The following instructions for checkingtire pressure should be observed:

# The pressure should be checked onlywhen the tires are cold. If your ve-hicle has been parked for at least 3hours and has not been driven formore than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, youwill get an accurate cold tire pressurereading.

# Always use a tire pressure gauge.The appearance of a tire can be mis-leading. Besides, tire pressures thatare even just a few pounds off candegrade ride and handling.

# Take special care when adding air tothe compact spare tire. The smallertire size can gain pressure very quick-ly. Add compressed air in small quanti-ties and check the pressure often untilit reaches the specified pressure.

# Do not bleed or reduce tire pressureafter driving. It is normal for the tirepressure to be higher after driving.

# Never exceed the vehicle capacityweight. The passenger and luggageweight should be located so that thevehicle is balanced.

# Be sure to reinstall the tire inflationvalve caps. Without the valve caps,dirt or moisture could get into the valvecore and cause air leakage. If the capshave been lost, have new ones put onas soon as possible.

—Checking tire pressure

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire tread for the tread wearindicators. If the indicators show, re-place the tires.

The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help you knowwhen the tires need replacement. Whenthe tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06in.) or less, the indicators will appear. Ifyou can see the indicators in two or moreadjacent grooves, the tire should be re-placed. The lower the tread, the higherthe risk of skidding.

Vehicles equipped with P215/50ZR17tires: Your Toyota has been fitted withspecially developed tires which provide ex-ceptional dynamic performance under gen-eral road conditions. However your ridingcomfort may worsen a little and roadnoise may increase during driving. Youmay also notice that your tires will wearmore rapidly and tire grip performance willbe reduced on the snowy and/or icy roadswhen compared to standard tires. Be sureto have snow tires or tire chains on thesnowy and/or icy roads and drive carefullywith the speed appropriate for road condi-tions.

NOTICE

Low profile tire like P215/50ZR17 mayhave greater damage than usual tiresto its tire wheel when receiving im-pact from the road surface. Therefore,pay attention to the followings.

! Be sure to use with proper tirepressure. If the tire pressure is low,the tire may have a greater damage.For detailed information about tirepressure, see page 272 in Section8.

! Avoid driving onto high, sharp−edged objects and other road haz-ards. Failure to do so can lead tosevere tire damage.

The effectiveness of snow tires is lostif the tread wears down below 4 mm(0.16 in.).

Check the tires regularly for damagesuch as cuts, splits and cracks. If anydamage is found, consult with a techni-cian and have the tire repaired or re-placed.

—Checking and replacing tires

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Even if the damage does not appear seri-ous, a qualified technician should examinethe damage. Objects which have pene-trated the tire may have caused internaldamage.

Any tires which are over 6 years oldmust be checked by a qualified techni-cian even if damage is not obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.

This also applies to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

Two−wheel drive models—When replac-ing a tire, use only the same size andconstruction as originally installed andwith the same or greater load capacity.

Four−wheel drive models—When replac-ing tires, make sure all the tires are thesame brand. Only use the same size,construction and tread patterns as theoriginally installed tires, with the sameor greater load capacity.

Using any other size or type of tire mayseriously affect handling, ride, speedome-ter/odometer calibration, ground clearance,and clearance between the body and tiresor snow chains.

CAUTION

# Do not mix radial, bias belted, orbias−ply tires on your vehicle. Itcan cause dangerous handling char-acteristics, resulting in loss of con-trol.

# Do not use tire or wheels otherthan the manufacturer’s recom-mended size.

Toyota recommends all four tires, or atleast both front or rear tires be re-placed as a set.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page 202in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Wheels can get outof balance with regular use and shouldtherefore be balanced occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the airvalve should also be replaced with anew one.

To equalize tire wear and help extendtire life, Toyota recommends that yourotate your tires according to the main-tenance schedule. (For scheduled main-tenance information, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) Howev-er, the most appropriate timing for tirerotation may vary according to yourdriving habits and road surface condi-tions.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page 202in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

—Rotating tires

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear is usu-ally caused by incorrect tire pressure, im-proper wheel alignment, out−of−balancewheels, or severe braking.

CAUTION

Do not include a compact spare tirewhen rotating the tires. It is designedfor temporary use only.

Turning direction

Type A

Type B

Vehicles equipped with P215/50ZR17tires: You have directional tires, and aturning indicator marked on the sidewall. Using tires on the wrong side ofthe vehicle will impair tire performance.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

Two−wheel drive models—If you needsnow tires, select the same size,construction and load capacity as theoriginal tires on your Toyota.

Four−wheel drive models—If you needsnow tires, select the same brand, size,construction, tread patterns and loadcapacity as the original tires on yourToyota.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

—Installing snow tires andchains

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires, which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

# Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

# Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size andtype.

Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chainsexcept radial cable chains or V−bar typechains.

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check thembefore installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

# Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

# Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

# Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

# When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering the curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to use a tire chain onthe compact spare tire, as it may re-sult in damage to the vehicle as wellas the tire.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace damaged wheels, thetire may slip off the wheel or cause lossof handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

This must be observed on compact sparetire, too.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

# When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

# If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

# When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

# Use only the Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

# When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

# As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

—Replacing wheels —Aluminum wheel precautions

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 3

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

! Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

! Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

! Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

! Never ingest electrolyte.

! Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

! Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

! If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

! If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

! If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

! If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

! Warning: Battery posts, terminalsand related accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Terminals Ground cable

Hold−downclamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery condition——Precautions —Checking battery exterior

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


NOTICE

! Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

! When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“−” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

! Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

! Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

Type A

Green DarkClear orlight yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

! Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

! Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

—Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Good

Good

Blown

Blown

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 236 in Sec-tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull a suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 273 in Section 8 of this manual forthe functions controlled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by usingthe pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “INV” or“P/POINT” fuse, which may be dispens-able for normal driving, and use it if itsamperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeas possible to the rating. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

Checking and replacing fuses

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work or lowwindshield washer fluid level warninglight* comes on, the washer tank maybe empty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

*: When equipped

The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

! To prevent from burning yourself,do not replace the light bulbs whilethey are hot.

! Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogged up in the rain. However,if there is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Headlights (low) 9006 51 A

Headlights (high) 9005 60 B

Front fog lights 9006 51 A

Parking, frontside marker andfront turn signallights

1157NA 27/8 C

Stop/tail and rearside markerlights

7443 21/5 D

Rear turn signallights

— 21 E

Back−up lights 921 16 D

High mountedstop light

921 16 D

License platelight

— 5 D

Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Interior lights — 8 D

Personal lights(on the insiderear view mirrorwithout compass)

192 4.3 D

Personal lights(on the switchpanel of theelectric moonroof)

— 10 C

A: HB4 halogen bulbsB: HB3 halogen bulbsC: Single end bulbsD: Wedge base bulbs (clear)E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)F: Double end bulbs

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb basecounterclockwise to the front of thevehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connectorinto the mounting hole.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Headlights (low beam)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


1. Open the hood.

LEFT−HAND HEADLIGHT: Remove theclip with a Phillips−head screwdriverand pull out and twist the air cleanerduct unit as shown.

Removing the clip

Installing the clip

2. Turn the bulb base counterclockwiseto the front of the vehicle.

—Headlights (high beam)

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)






1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb basecounterclockwise to the front of thevehicle as shown.

—Front fog lights

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)






—Parking, front side markerand front turn signal lights

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


a: Stop/tail and rear side marker lightb: Rear turn signal lightc: Back−up light

Remove the clips with a Phillips−headscrewdriver and remove the cover.

—Stop/tail, rear side marker,rear turn signal and back−uplights —High mounted stoplight

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Remove the clips

Installing the clips

Remove the bolts with a Phillips−headscrewdriver.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Remove the cover with a flat−bladedscrewdriver which is wrapped with acloth.

—License plate lights

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


SPECIFICATIONSDimensions and weight 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service specifications 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tires 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Model: 1ZZ−FE and 2ZZ−GE

Type: 4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.): 1ZZ−FE engine

79.0 ! 91.5 (3.11 ! 3.60)2ZZ−GE engine

82.0 ! 85.0 (3.23 ! 3.35)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):1ZZ−FE engine 1794 (109.5)2ZZ−GE engine 1796 (109.6)

Dimensions and weight

Overall length mm (in.)

Overall width mm (in.)

Overall height∗1 mm (in.)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.)

Rear tread mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) kg (lb.)

P205/55R16 tires P215/50ZR17 tires

4350 (171.3) 4350 (171.3)

1765 (69.5) 1765 (69.5)

1585 (62.4)

2600 (102.4) 2600 (102.4)

1515 (59.6) 1505 (59.3)

1495 (58.9)∗2

1500 (59.1)∗3 1485 (58.5)

385 (850) 385 (850)

∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: Two−wheel drive models∗3: Four−wheel drive models

1575 (62.0)∗2

1585 (62.4)∗3

Engine

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Fuel type:

1ZZ−FE engineUnleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) orhigher

2ZZ−GE engineSelect premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-tane Number 96) or higher for opti-mum engine performance

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., lmp. gal.):

Two−wheel drive models50 L (13.2 gal., 11.0 lmp. gal.)

Four−wheel drive models45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 lmp. gal.)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

1ZZ−FE engineIntake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

2ZZ−GE engine (on a roller side)Intake 0.08—0.18 (0.003—0.007)Exhaust 0.22—0.32 (0.009—0.013)

Spark plug type:

1ZZ−FE engineDENSO SK16R11NGK IFR5A11

2ZZ−GE engineDENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1ZZ−FE engineWith filter 3.7 (3.9, 3.3)Without filter 3.5 (3.7, 3.1)

2ZZ−GE engineWith filter 4.4 (4.8, 4.0)Without filter 4.2 (4.6, 3.8)

Oil grade:API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil is recom-mended.

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

Fuel Service specifications

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1ZZ−FE engine 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)2ZZ−GE engine 6.7 (7.0, 5.9)

Coolant type:

“TOYOTA Long Life Coolant” or equiva-lent

With ethylene−glycol type coolant for aproper corrosion protection of aluminumcomponents


BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20!C (68!F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all the lightsturned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

CLUTCH

Pedal free play, mm (in.):5—15 (0.2—0.6)

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):5−speed 1.9 (2.0, 1.7)6−speed 2.3 (2.4, 2.0)

Oil type:Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 75W−90

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp. qt.):

1ZZ−FE engineTwo−wheel drive models

Up to 3.1 (3.3, 2.7)Four−wheel drive models

Up to 2.9 (3.1, 2.6)

2ZZ−GE engineUp to 4.1 (4.3, 3.6)

Fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid Type T−IV

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV(ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid inassuring optimum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than Toyota Genuine ATFType T−IV may cause deterioration inshift quality, locking up of your trans-mission accompanied by vibration, andultimately damage the automatic trans-mission of your vehicle.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


TRANSFER(four−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.8 (0.8, 0.7)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18!C (0!F)

SAE 90Below −18!C (0!F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

REAR DIFFERENTIAL(four−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.5 (0.5, 0.4)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18!C (0!F)

SAE 90Below −18!C (0!F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the engine running, mm (in.):

70 (2.8)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when pulled withthe force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf):

5—8 clicks

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON"IIor III

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Tire size and pressure:

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire size Front Rear Wheel size

Two−wheel drive modelsP205/55R16 89H 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 16 ! 6 1/2JJ

P215/50ZR17 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17 ! 7 JJ

Four−wheel drive models P205/55R16 89H 240 (2.4, 35) 220 (2.2, 32) 16 ! 6 1/2JJ

Compact spare tireTire size kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size

T135/70R16 420 (4.2, 60) 16 ! 4TT135/80R16 420 (4.2, 60) 16 ! 4T

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):103 (10.5, 77)

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Tire information”, pages 246 through 252, inSection 7−2.

Tires

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Engine compartment

Instrument panel

Fuses (type A)

1. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

2. HEAD LH UPR 10 A: Left−hand head-light (high beam)

3. HEAD RH UPR 10 A: Right−handheadlight (high beam), headlight highbeam indicator light

4. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse



7. MAIN 30 A: Starting system, “AM2”fuse

8. DOME 15 A: Car audio system, navi-gation system, clock, personal lights,interior lights, open door warning light,wireless remote control system

9. HORN 10 A: Horn

10. HAZARD 10 A: Emergency flashers,turn signal lights

11. EFI 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, emission control system

12. ALT−S 5 A: Charging system

13. HEAD LH LWR 10 A: Left−hand head-light (low beam)

14. HEAD RH LWR 10 A: Right−handheadlight (low beam)

15. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, license platelights, instrument panel lights, instru-ment cluster lights

16. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

17. WIPER 25 A: Windshield wipers

18. AM2 15 A: Charging system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, starting sys-tem, SRS airbag system

Fuses

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


19. STOP 15 A: Stop lights, high mountedstoplight, anti−lock brake system, shiftlock control system, engine control sys-tem, cruise control system

20. DOOR 25 A: Power door lock system,glass hatch opener switch

21. AM1 25 A: “CIG” fuse

22. ECU−IG 10 A: Electric cooling fan,anti−lock brake system, shift lock con-trol system, cruise control system

23. RR WIPER 15 A: Rear window wiper

24. A/C 10 A: Air conditioning system

25. INV 15 A: Power outlet (115 VAC)

26. P/POINT 15 A: Power outlet (12 VDC/in the rear console box)

27. ECU−B 10 A: Daytime running lightsystem

28. CIG 15 A: Power outlet (12 VDC/onthe instrument panel) or cigarette light-er, car audio system, clock, shift lockcontrol system

29. GAUGE 10 A: Gauges and meters, airconditioning system, daytime runninglight system, charging system, autoanti−glare inside rear view mirror, pow-er windows, cruise control system, rearwindow defogger, back−up lights, frontpassenger’s seat belt reminder light

30. WASHER 15 A: Windshield washer,rear window washer

31. M−HTR/DEF I−UP 10 A: Engine controlsystem

Fuses (type B)

32. ABS NO.1 30 A: Anti−lock brake sys-tem

33. RDI FAN 40 A: Electric cooling fan

34. ABS NO.2 40 A: Anti−lock brake sys-tem

35. HEAD MAIN 40 A: “HEAD LH UPR”,“HEAD RH UPR”, “HEAD LH LWR” and“HEAD RH LWR” fuses

36. HTR 40 A: Air conditioning system

37. DEF 30 A: Rear window defogger,“M−HTR/DEF I−UP” fuse

38. POWER 30 A: Power windows, electricmoon roof

Fuses (type C)

39. ALT 100 A: “ABS NO.1”, “ABS NO.2”,“RDI FAN”, “FOG”, “HTR”, “AM1”,“POWER”, “DOOR”, “ECU−B”, “TAIL”,“STOP”, “P/POINT”, “INV” and “OBD”fuses, charging system

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADINGReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform tire quality grading 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei-ther call the Auto Safety Hotlinetoll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or366−0123 in Washington, D.C.area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation,Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from the Hot-line.

This information has been prepared in ac-cordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-tration of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyotavehicles with information on uniform tirequality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer anyquestions you may have as you read thisinformation.

DOT quality grades—All passenger cartires must conform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades. Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners Uniform tire quality grading

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Treadwear—The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wear rateof the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and a half (1−1/2) timesas well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and may de-part significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road characteris-tics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C, and they represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on spe-cified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not includecornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, C—The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire to de-generate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a lev-el of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for thistire are established for a tire that is prop-erly inflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combina-tion, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Publication No. OM12767UPart No. 01999-12767Printed in Japan 01-0201-00

( U)

Quick index

! If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 86. . . . . . . . .

! If your vehicle will not start 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! If your engine stalls while driving 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! If your vehicle overheats 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! If you have a flat tire 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! If your vehicle needs to be towed 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! Tips for driving during break−in period 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! How to start the engine 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! General maintenance 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

! Complete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

1ZZ−FE engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research OctaneNumber 91) or higher

2ZZ−GE engine: Premium UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 91 (ResearchOctane Number 96) or higher

See page 168 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: Two−wheel drive models: 50 L (13.2 gal., 11.0 lmp. gal.)Four−wheel drive models: 45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 lmp. gal.)

Engine oil: API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recom-mended.

See page 243 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 246 through 252.

Tire pressure: See page 272.

qU−2

C

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.

’03 MATRIX_U (L/O 0201)


Where to obtain the Repair Manual

The repair manual for COROLLA MATRIX, writ-ten in English, may be purchased as applicablefrom any Toyota dealer.Pub. Name: 2003 COROLLA MATRIX Repair

ManualPub. No.: RM940U1 (Maintenance, Preparation,

Service specifications and Diagnostics)RM940U2 (Engine, Chassis, Body andElectrical)

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to preventsmall problems from growing into larger ones later on.The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenanceis required and clearly explains how to do the workyourself step−by−step.Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.

Foreword - Amazon Simple Storage Service · 2003 MY COROLLA MATRIX_U (OM12767U) Foreword ... 2003...

Documents

Transcript of Foreword - Amazon Simple Storage Service · 2003 MY COROLLA MATRIX_U (OM12767U) Foreword ... 2003...